| 1 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
%% TeX macros to handle texinfo files |
| 2 : |
|
|
|
| 3 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 1994 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
| 4 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 5 : |
|
|
%This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or |
| 6 : |
|
|
%modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as |
| 7 : |
|
|
%published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at |
| 8 : |
|
|
%your option) any later version. |
| 9 : |
|
|
|
| 10 : |
|
|
%This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be |
| 11 : |
|
|
%useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty |
| 12 : |
|
|
%of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU |
| 13 : |
|
|
%General Public License for more details. |
| 14 : |
|
|
|
| 15 : |
|
|
%You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License |
| 16 : |
|
|
%along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write |
| 17 : |
|
|
%to the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, |
| 18 : |
|
|
%USA. |
| 19 : |
|
|
|
| 20 : |
|
|
|
| 21 : |
|
|
%In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program. |
| 22 : |
|
|
%You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve |
| 23 : |
|
|
%what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding! |
| 24 : |
|
|
|
| 25 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% This automatically updates the version number based on RCS. |
| 26 : |
|
|
\def\deftexinfoversion$#1: #2 ${\def\texinfoversion{#2}} |
| 27 : |
|
|
\deftexinfoversion$Revision: 2.137 $ |
| 28 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\message{Loading texinfo package [Version \texinfoversion]:} |
| 29 : |
|
|
|
| 30 : |
|
|
% Print the version number if in a .fmt file. |
| 31 : |
|
|
\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}\message{}} |
| 32 : |
|
|
|
| 33 : |
|
|
% Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine. |
| 34 : |
|
|
|
| 35 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\let\ptextilde=\~ |
| 36 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\let\ptexlbrace=\{ |
| 37 : |
|
|
\let\ptexrbrace=\} |
| 38 : |
|
|
\let\ptexdots=\dots |
| 39 : |
|
|
\let\ptexdot=\. |
| 40 : |
|
|
\let\ptexstar=\* |
| 41 : |
|
|
\let\ptexend=\end |
| 42 : |
|
|
\let\ptexbullet=\bullet |
| 43 : |
|
|
\let\ptexb=\b |
| 44 : |
|
|
\let\ptexc=\c |
| 45 : |
|
|
\let\ptexi=\i |
| 46 : |
|
|
\let\ptext=\t |
| 47 : |
|
|
\let\ptexl=\l |
| 48 : |
|
|
\let\ptexL=\L |
| 49 : |
|
|
|
| 50 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space |
| 51 : |
|
|
% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space |
| 52 : |
|
|
% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and |
| 53 : |
|
|
% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the |
| 54 : |
|
|
% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. |
| 55 : |
|
|
{\catcode`@ = 11 |
| 56 : |
|
|
\gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\ } |
| 57 : |
|
|
} |
| 58 : |
|
|
\let\~ = \tie % And make it available as @~. |
| 59 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 60 : |
|
|
\message{Basics,} |
| 61 : |
|
|
\chardef\other=12 |
| 62 : |
|
|
|
| 63 : |
|
|
% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it |
| 64 : |
|
|
% starts a new line in the output. |
| 65 : |
|
|
\newlinechar = `^^J |
| 66 : |
|
|
|
| 67 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Set up fixed words for English. |
| 68 : |
|
|
\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined{\gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}}\fi% |
| 69 : |
|
|
\def\putwordInfo{Info}% |
| 70 : |
|
|
\ifx\putwordSee\undefined{\gdef\putwordSee{See}}\fi% |
| 71 : |
|
|
\ifx\putwordsee\undefined{\gdef\putwordsee{see}}\fi% |
| 72 : |
|
|
\ifx\putwordfile\undefined{\gdef\putwordfile{file}}\fi% |
| 73 : |
|
|
\ifx\putwordpage\undefined{\gdef\putwordpage{page}}\fi% |
| 74 : |
|
|
\ifx\putwordsection\undefined{\gdef\putwordsection{section}}\fi% |
| 75 : |
|
|
\ifx\putwordSection\undefined{\gdef\putwordSection{Section}}\fi% |
| 76 : |
|
|
\ifx\putwordTableofContents\undefined{\gdef\putwordTableofContents{Table of Contents}}\fi% |
| 77 : |
|
|
\ifx\putwordShortContents\undefined{\gdef\putwordShortContents{Short Contents}}\fi% |
| 78 : |
|
|
\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined{\gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}}\fi% |
| 79 : |
|
|
|
| 80 : |
|
|
% Ignore a token. |
| 81 : |
|
|
% |
| 82 : |
|
|
\def\gobble#1{} |
| 83 : |
|
|
|
| 84 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix} |
| 85 : |
|
|
\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers} |
| 86 : |
|
|
\hyphenation{eshell} |
| 87 : |
|
|
|
| 88 : |
|
|
% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. |
| 89 : |
|
|
\newdimen \bindingoffset \bindingoffset=0pt |
| 90 : |
|
|
\newdimen \normaloffset \normaloffset=\hoffset |
| 91 : |
|
|
\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight |
| 92 : |
|
|
\pagewidth=\hsize \pageheight=\vsize |
| 93 : |
|
|
|
| 94 : |
|
|
% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file |
| 95 : |
|
|
% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, |
| 96 : |
|
|
% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. |
| 97 : |
|
|
% |
| 98 : |
|
|
\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% |
| 99 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2 |
| 100 : |
|
|
\tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1 |
| 101 : |
|
|
\tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1 |
| 102 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen |
| 103 : |
|
|
}% |
| 104 : |
|
|
|
| 105 : |
|
|
%---------------------Begin change----------------------- |
| 106 : |
|
|
% |
| 107 : |
|
|
%%%% For @cropmarks command. |
| 108 : |
|
|
% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 |
| 109 : |
|
|
% |
| 110 : |
|
|
\newdimen\cornerlong \newdimen\cornerthick |
| 111 : |
|
|
\newdimen \topandbottommargin |
| 112 : |
|
|
\newdimen \outerhsize \newdimen \outervsize |
| 113 : |
|
|
\cornerlong=1pc\cornerthick=.3pt % These set size of cropmarks |
| 114 : |
|
|
\outerhsize=7in |
| 115 : |
|
|
%\outervsize=9.5in |
| 116 : |
|
|
% Alternative @smallbook page size is 9.25in |
| 117 : |
|
|
\outervsize=9.25in |
| 118 : |
|
|
\topandbottommargin=.75in |
| 119 : |
|
|
% |
| 120 : |
|
|
%---------------------End change----------------------- |
| 121 : |
|
|
|
| 122 : |
|
|
% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents |
| 123 : |
|
|
% does insertions itself, but you have to call it yourself. |
| 124 : |
|
|
\chardef\PAGE=255 \output={\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} |
| 125 : |
|
|
\def\onepageout#1{\hoffset=\normaloffset |
| 126 : |
|
|
\ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset |
| 127 : |
|
|
\else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi |
| 128 : |
|
|
{\escapechar=`\\\relax % makes sure backslash is used in output files. |
| 129 : |
|
|
\shipout\vbox{{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline} \pagebody{#1}% |
| 130 : |
|
|
{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}}}% |
| 131 : |
|
|
\advancepageno \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi} |
| 132 : |
|
|
|
| 133 : |
|
|
%%%% For @cropmarks command %%%% |
| 134 : |
|
|
|
| 135 : |
|
|
% Here is a modification of the main output routine for Near East Publications |
| 136 : |
|
|
% This provides right-angle cropmarks at all four corners. |
| 137 : |
|
|
% The contents of the page are centerlined into the cropmarks, |
| 138 : |
|
|
% and any desired binding offset is added as an \hskip on either |
| 139 : |
|
|
% site of the centerlined box. (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) |
| 140 : |
|
|
% |
| 141 : |
|
|
\def\croppageout#1{\hoffset=0pt % make sure this doesn't mess things up |
| 142 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
{\escapechar=`\\\relax % makes sure backslash is used in output files. |
| 143 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\shipout |
| 144 : |
|
|
\vbox to \outervsize{\hsize=\outerhsize |
| 145 : |
|
|
\vbox{\line{\ewtop\hfill\ewtop}} |
| 146 : |
|
|
\nointerlineskip |
| 147 : |
|
|
\line{\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop} |
| 148 : |
|
|
\hfill |
| 149 : |
|
|
\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}} |
| 150 : |
|
|
\vskip \topandbottommargin |
| 151 : |
|
|
\centerline{\ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi |
| 152 : |
|
|
\vbox{ |
| 153 : |
|
|
{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline} |
| 154 : |
|
|
\pagebody{#1} |
| 155 : |
|
|
{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}} |
| 156 : |
|
|
\ifodd\pageno\else\hskip\bindingoffset\fi} |
| 157 : |
|
|
\vskip \topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill |
| 158 : |
|
|
\boxmaxdepth\cornerthick |
| 159 : |
|
|
\line{\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot} |
| 160 : |
|
|
\hfill |
| 161 : |
|
|
\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}} |
| 162 : |
|
|
\nointerlineskip |
| 163 : |
|
|
\vbox{\line{\ewbot\hfill\ewbot}} |
| 164 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
}} |
| 165 : |
|
|
\advancepageno |
| 166 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi} |
| 167 : |
|
|
% |
| 168 : |
|
|
% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks |
| 169 : |
|
|
\def\cropmarks{\let\onepageout=\croppageout } |
| 170 : |
|
|
|
| 171 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen |
| 172 : |
|
|
|
| 173 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} |
| 174 : |
|
|
{\catcode`\@ =11 |
| 175 : |
|
|
\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi |
| 176 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) |
| 177 : |
|
|
\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present |
| 178 : |
|
|
\rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi |
| 179 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1 |
| 180 : |
|
|
\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi |
| 181 : |
|
|
\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} |
| 182 : |
|
|
} |
| 183 : |
|
|
|
| 184 : |
|
|
% |
| 185 : |
|
|
% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are |
| 186 : |
|
|
% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize |
| 187 : |
|
|
% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) |
| 188 : |
|
|
% |
| 189 : |
|
|
\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} |
| 190 : |
|
|
\def\nstop{\vbox |
| 191 : |
|
|
{\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} |
| 192 : |
|
|
\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} |
| 193 : |
|
|
\def\nsbot{\vbox |
| 194 : |
|
|
{\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} |
| 195 : |
|
|
|
| 196 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of |
| 197 : |
|
|
% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a |
| 198 : |
|
|
% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. |
| 199 : |
|
|
% |
| 200 : |
|
|
\def\parsearg#1{% |
| 201 : |
|
|
\let\next = #1% |
| 202 : |
|
|
\begingroup |
| 203 : |
|
|
\obeylines |
| 204 : |
|
|
\futurelet\temp\parseargx |
| 205 : |
|
|
} |
| 206 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 207 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or |
| 208 : |
|
|
% the like), remove it and recurse. Otherwise, we're done. |
| 209 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\parseargx{% |
| 210 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces. |
| 211 : |
|
|
\ifx\obeyedspace\temp |
| 212 : |
|
|
\expandafter\parseargdiscardspace |
| 213 : |
|
|
\else |
| 214 : |
|
|
\expandafter\parseargline |
| 215 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 216 : |
|
|
} |
| 217 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 218 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call). |
| 219 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
{\obeyspaces % |
| 220 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}} |
| 221 : |
|
|
|
| 222 : |
|
|
{\obeylines % |
| 223 : |
|
|
\gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% |
| 224 : |
|
|
\endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. |
| 225 : |
|
|
% |
| 226 : |
|
|
% First remove any @c comment, then any @comment. |
| 227 : |
|
|
% Result of each macro is put in \toks0. |
| 228 : |
|
|
\argremovec #1\c\relax % |
| 229 : |
|
|
\expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax % |
| 230 : |
|
|
% |
| 231 : |
|
|
% Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg. |
| 232 : |
|
|
\expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}% |
| 233 : |
|
|
}% |
| 234 : |
|
|
} |
| 235 : |
|
|
|
| 236 : |
|
|
% Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX |
| 237 : |
|
|
% do that for us. The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call |
| 238 : |
|
|
% in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is |
| 239 : |
|
|
% just to delimit the argument to the \c. |
| 240 : |
|
|
\def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}} |
| 241 : |
|
|
\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}} |
| 242 : |
|
|
|
| 243 : |
|
|
% \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g., |
| 244 : |
|
|
% @end itemize @c foo |
| 245 : |
|
|
% will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the |
| 246 : |
|
|
% `itemize'. Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the |
| 247 : |
|
|
% result to \toks0. |
| 248 : |
|
|
% |
| 249 : |
|
|
% This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces |
| 250 : |
|
|
% in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded. |
| 251 : |
|
|
% Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands. (If it ever |
| 252 : |
|
|
% does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed |
| 253 : |
|
|
% here.) But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of |
| 254 : |
|
|
% \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument |
| 255 : |
|
|
% that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it. |
| 256 : |
|
|
% |
| 257 : |
|
|
\def\removeactivespaces#1{% |
| 258 : |
|
|
\begingroup |
| 259 : |
|
|
\ignoreactivespaces |
| 260 : |
|
|
\edef\temp{#1}% |
| 261 : |
|
|
\global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}% |
| 262 : |
|
|
\endgroup |
| 263 : |
|
|
} |
| 264 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 265 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Change the active space to expand to nothing. |
| 266 : |
|
|
% |
| 267 : |
|
|
\begingroup |
| 268 : |
|
|
\obeyspaces |
| 269 : |
|
|
\gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty} |
| 270 : |
|
|
\endgroup |
| 271 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 272 : |
|
|
|
| 273 : |
|
|
\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} |
| 274 : |
|
|
|
| 275 : |
|
|
%% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away |
| 276 : |
|
|
%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup) |
| 277 : |
|
|
\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi} |
| 278 : |
|
|
\def\ENVcheck{% |
| 279 : |
|
|
\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment. Type Return to continue.} |
| 280 : |
|
|
\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage |
| 281 : |
|
|
|
| 282 : |
|
|
% @begin foo is the same as @foo, for now. |
| 283 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\newhelp\EMsimple{Type <Return> to continue.} |
| 284 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 285 : |
|
|
\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx} |
| 286 : |
|
|
|
| 287 : |
|
|
\def\beginxxx #1{% |
| 288 : |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax |
| 289 : |
|
|
{\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else |
| 290 : |
|
|
\csname #1\endcsname\fi} |
| 291 : |
|
|
|
| 292 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. |
| 293 : |
|
|
% |
| 294 : |
|
|
\def\end{\parsearg\endxxx} |
| 295 : |
|
|
\def\endxxx #1{% |
| 296 : |
|
|
\removeactivespaces{#1}% |
| 297 : |
|
|
\edef\endthing{\the\toks0}% |
| 298 : |
|
|
% |
| 299 : |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax |
| 300 : |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax |
| 301 : |
|
|
% There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo. |
| 302 : |
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple |
| 303 : |
|
|
\errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}% |
| 304 : |
|
|
\else |
| 305 : |
|
|
\unmatchedenderror\endthing |
| 306 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 307 : |
|
|
\else |
| 308 : |
|
|
% Everything's ok; the right environment has been started. |
| 309 : |
|
|
\csname E\endthing\endcsname |
| 310 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 311 : |
|
|
} |
| 312 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 313 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started. Give an error. |
| 314 : |
|
|
% |
| 315 : |
|
|
\def\unmatchedenderror#1{% |
| 316 : |
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple |
| 317 : |
|
|
\errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}% |
| 318 : |
|
|
} |
| 319 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 320 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error. |
| 321 : |
|
|
% |
| 322 : |
|
|
\def\defineunmatchedend#1{% |
| 323 : |
|
|
\expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}% |
| 324 : |
|
|
} |
| 325 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 326 : |
|
|
|
| 327 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in |
| 328 : |
|
|
% \nonfillstart and \quotations). |
| 329 : |
|
|
\newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt |
| 330 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\singlespace{% |
| 331 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Why was this kern here? It messes up equalizing space above and below |
| 332 : |
|
|
% environments. --karl, 6may93 |
| 333 : |
|
|
%{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip |
| 334 : |
|
|
%\kern \baselineskip}% |
| 335 : |
|
|
\setleading \singlespaceskip |
| 336 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
} |
| 337 : |
|
|
|
| 338 : |
|
|
%% Simple single-character @ commands |
| 339 : |
|
|
|
| 340 : |
|
|
% @@ prints an @ |
| 341 : |
|
|
% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). |
| 342 : |
|
|
\def\@{{\tt \char '100}} |
| 343 : |
|
|
|
| 344 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% This is turned off because it was never documented |
| 345 : |
|
|
% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. |
| 346 : |
|
|
%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and ' |
| 347 : |
|
|
%% but suppressing ligatures. |
| 348 : |
|
|
%\def\`{{`}} |
| 349 : |
|
|
%\def\'{{'}} |
| 350 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 351 : |
|
|
% Used to generate quoted braces. |
| 352 : |
|
|
|
| 353 : |
|
|
\def\mylbrace {{\tt \char '173}} |
| 354 : |
|
|
\def\myrbrace {{\tt \char '175}} |
| 355 : |
|
|
\let\{=\mylbrace |
| 356 : |
|
|
\let\}=\myrbrace |
| 357 : |
|
|
|
| 358 : |
|
|
% @: forces normal size whitespace following. |
| 359 : |
|
|
\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } |
| 360 : |
|
|
|
| 361 : |
|
|
% @* forces a line break. |
| 362 : |
|
|
\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} |
| 363 : |
|
|
|
| 364 : |
|
|
% @. is an end-of-sentence period. |
| 365 : |
|
|
\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 } |
| 366 : |
|
|
|
| 367 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. |
| 368 : |
|
|
\gdef\enddots{$\mathinner{\ldotp\ldotp\ldotp\ldotp}$\spacefactor=3000} |
| 369 : |
|
|
|
| 370 : |
|
|
% @! is an end-of-sentence bang. |
| 371 : |
|
|
\gdef\!{!\spacefactor=3000 } |
| 372 : |
|
|
|
| 373 : |
|
|
% @? is an end-of-sentence query. |
| 374 : |
|
|
\gdef\?{?\spacefactor=3000 } |
| 375 : |
|
|
|
| 376 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the |
| 377 : |
|
|
% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would |
| 378 : |
|
|
% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. |
| 379 : |
|
|
\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} |
| 380 : |
|
|
|
| 381 : |
|
|
% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing |
| 382 : |
|
|
% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box |
| 383 : |
|
|
% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for |
| 384 : |
|
|
% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is |
| 385 : |
|
|
% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, |
| 386 : |
|
|
% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and |
| 387 : |
|
|
% the text is small, which looks bad. |
| 388 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 389 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\group{\begingroup |
| 390 : |
|
|
\ifnum\catcode13=\active \else |
| 391 : |
|
|
\errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp |
| 392 : |
|
|
\errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% |
| 393 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 394 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 395 : |
|
|
% The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large |
| 396 : |
|
|
% depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the |
| 397 : |
|
|
% next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it. (See p.82 of |
| 398 : |
|
|
% the TeXbook.) Thus, space below is not quite equal to space |
| 399 : |
|
|
% above. But it's pretty close. |
| 400 : |
|
|
\def\Egroup{% |
| 401 : |
|
|
\egroup % End the \vtop. |
| 402 : |
|
|
\endgroup % End the \group. |
| 403 : |
|
|
}% |
| 404 : |
|
|
% |
| 405 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\vtop\bgroup |
| 406 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in |
| 407 : |
|
|
% the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it. |
| 408 : |
|
|
% Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group |
| 409 : |
|
|
% and the first line afterwards is too small. But we can't put the |
| 410 : |
|
|
% strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself. |
| 411 : |
|
|
% Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line. |
| 412 : |
|
|
\everypar = {\strut}% |
| 413 : |
|
|
% |
| 414 : |
|
|
% Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's |
| 415 : |
|
|
% normal interline spacing. |
| 416 : |
|
|
\offinterlineskip |
| 417 : |
|
|
% |
| 418 : |
|
|
% OK, but now we have to do something about blank |
| 419 : |
|
|
% lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally |
| 420 : |
|
|
% just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've |
| 421 : |
|
|
% turned off the interline space. Simplest is to make them be an |
| 422 : |
|
|
% empty paragraph. |
| 423 : |
|
|
\ifx\par\lisppar |
| 424 : |
|
|
\edef\par{\leavevmode \par}% |
| 425 : |
|
|
% |
| 426 : |
|
|
% Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par. |
| 427 : |
|
|
\obeylines |
| 428 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 429 : |
|
|
% |
| 430 : |
|
|
% Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as |
| 431 : |
|
|
% @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an |
| 432 : |
|
|
% end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after |
| 433 : |
|
|
% the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group |
| 434 : |
|
|
% should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo |
| 435 : |
|
|
% manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. |
| 436 : |
|
|
\comment |
| 437 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
} |
| 438 : |
|
|
% |
| 439 : |
|
|
% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help |
| 440 : |
|
|
% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. |
| 441 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 442 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% |
| 443 : |
|
|
group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% |
| 444 : |
|
|
where each line of input produces a line of output.} |
| 445 : |
|
|
|
| 446 : |
|
|
% @need space-in-mils |
| 447 : |
|
|
% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. |
| 448 : |
|
|
|
| 449 : |
|
|
\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in |
| 450 : |
|
|
|
| 451 : |
|
|
\def\need{\parsearg\needx} |
| 452 : |
|
|
|
| 453 : |
|
|
% Old definition--didn't work. |
| 454 : |
|
|
%\def\needx #1{\par % |
| 455 : |
|
|
%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally |
| 456 : |
|
|
%% if the depth of the box does not fit. |
| 457 : |
|
|
%{\baselineskip=0pt% |
| 458 : |
|
|
%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\penalty 10000 |
| 459 : |
|
|
%\prevdepth=-1000pt |
| 460 : |
|
|
%}} |
| 461 : |
|
|
|
| 462 : |
|
|
\def\needx#1{% |
| 463 : |
|
|
% Go into vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a |
| 464 : |
|
|
% paragraph. |
| 465 : |
|
|
\par |
| 466 : |
|
|
% |
| 467 : |
|
|
% Don't add any leading before our big empty box, but allow a page |
| 468 : |
|
|
% break, since the best break might be right here. |
| 469 : |
|
|
\allowbreak |
| 470 : |
|
|
\nointerlineskip |
| 471 : |
|
|
\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}% |
| 472 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 473 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the |
| 474 : |
|
|
% main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the |
| 475 : |
|
|
% empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider |
| 476 : |
|
|
% page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the |
| 477 : |
|
|
% page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. |
| 478 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 479 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the |
| 480 : |
|
|
% page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in |
| 481 : |
|
|
% sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which |
| 482 : |
|
|
% almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing |
| 483 : |
|
|
% good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an |
| 484 : |
|
|
% example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real |
| 485 : |
|
|
% document, then we can reconsider our strategy. |
| 486 : |
|
|
\penalty9999 |
| 487 : |
|
|
% |
| 488 : |
|
|
% Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. |
| 489 : |
|
|
\kern -#1\mil |
| 490 : |
|
|
% |
| 491 : |
|
|
% Do not allow a page break right after this kern. |
| 492 : |
|
|
\nobreak |
| 493 : |
|
|
} |
| 494 : |
|
|
|
| 495 : |
|
|
% @br forces paragraph break |
| 496 : |
|
|
|
| 497 : |
|
|
\let\br = \par |
| 498 : |
|
|
|
| 499 : |
|
|
% @dots{} output some dots |
| 500 : |
|
|
|
| 501 : |
|
|
\def\dots{$\ldots$} |
| 502 : |
|
|
|
| 503 : |
|
|
% @page forces the start of a new page |
| 504 : |
|
|
|
| 505 : |
|
|
\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} |
| 506 : |
|
|
|
| 507 : |
|
|
% @exdent text.... |
| 508 : |
|
|
% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin |
| 509 : |
|
|
|
| 510 : |
|
|
% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. |
| 511 : |
|
|
% That's how much \exdent should take out. |
| 512 : |
|
|
\newskip\exdentamount |
| 513 : |
|
|
|
| 514 : |
|
|
% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. |
| 515 : |
|
|
\def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy} |
| 516 : |
|
|
\def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}} |
| 517 : |
|
|
|
| 518 : |
|
|
% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. |
| 519 : |
|
|
\def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy} |
| 520 : |
|
|
\def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount |
| 521 : |
|
|
\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} |
| 522 : |
|
|
|
| 523 : |
|
|
%\hbox{{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}} |
| 524 : |
|
|
|
| 525 : |
|
|
% @include file insert text of that file as input. |
| 526 : |
|
|
|
| 527 : |
|
|
\def\include{\parsearg\includezzz} |
| 528 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
%Use \input\thisfile to avoid blank after \input, which may be an active |
| 529 : |
|
|
%char (in which case the blank would become the \input argument). |
| 530 : |
|
|
%The grouping keeps the value of \thisfile correct even when @include |
| 531 : |
|
|
%is nested. |
| 532 : |
|
|
\def\includezzz #1{\begingroup |
| 533 : |
|
|
\def\thisfile{#1}\input\thisfile |
| 534 : |
|
|
\endgroup} |
| 535 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 536 : |
|
|
\def\thisfile{} |
| 537 : |
|
|
|
| 538 : |
|
|
% @center line outputs that line, centered |
| 539 : |
|
|
|
| 540 : |
|
|
\def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz} |
| 541 : |
|
|
\def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip |
| 542 : |
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\rightskip |
| 543 : |
|
|
\centerline{#1}}} |
| 544 : |
|
|
|
| 545 : |
|
|
% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space |
| 546 : |
|
|
|
| 547 : |
|
|
\def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx} |
| 548 : |
|
|
\def\spxxx #1{\par \vskip #1\baselineskip} |
| 549 : |
|
|
|
| 550 : |
|
|
% @comment ...line which is ignored... |
| 551 : |
|
|
% @c is the same as @comment |
| 552 : |
|
|
% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment |
| 553 : |
|
|
|
| 554 : |
|
|
\def\comment{\catcode 64=\other \catcode 123=\other \catcode 125=\other% |
| 555 : |
|
|
\parsearg \commentxxx} |
| 556 : |
|
|
|
| 557 : |
|
|
\def\commentxxx #1{\catcode 64=0 \catcode 123=1 \catcode 125=2 } |
| 558 : |
|
|
|
| 559 : |
|
|
\let\c=\comment |
| 560 : |
|
|
|
| 561 : |
|
|
% Prevent errors for section commands. |
| 562 : |
|
|
% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals. |
| 563 : |
|
|
\def\ignoresections{% |
| 564 : |
|
|
\let\chapter=\relax |
| 565 : |
|
|
\let\unnumbered=\relax |
| 566 : |
|
|
\let\top=\relax |
| 567 : |
|
|
\let\unnumberedsec=\relax |
| 568 : |
|
|
\let\unnumberedsection=\relax |
| 569 : |
|
|
\let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax |
| 570 : |
|
|
\let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax |
| 571 : |
|
|
\let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax |
| 572 : |
|
|
\let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax |
| 573 : |
|
|
\let\section=\relax |
| 574 : |
|
|
\let\subsec=\relax |
| 575 : |
|
|
\let\subsubsec=\relax |
| 576 : |
|
|
\let\subsection=\relax |
| 577 : |
|
|
\let\subsubsection=\relax |
| 578 : |
|
|
\let\appendix=\relax |
| 579 : |
|
|
\let\appendixsec=\relax |
| 580 : |
|
|
\let\appendixsection=\relax |
| 581 : |
|
|
\let\appendixsubsec=\relax |
| 582 : |
|
|
\let\appendixsubsection=\relax |
| 583 : |
|
|
\let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax |
| 584 : |
|
|
\let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax |
| 585 : |
|
|
\let\contents=\relax |
| 586 : |
|
|
\let\smallbook=\relax |
| 587 : |
|
|
\let\titlepage=\relax |
| 588 : |
|
|
} |
| 589 : |
|
|
|
| 590 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source |
| 591 : |
|
|
% and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used |
| 592 : |
|
|
% incorrectly. |
| 593 : |
|
|
% |
| 594 : |
|
|
\def\ignoremorecommands{% |
| 595 : |
|
|
\let\defcv = \relax |
| 596 : |
|
|
\let\deffn = \relax |
| 597 : |
|
|
\let\deffnx = \relax |
| 598 : |
|
|
\let\defindex = \relax |
| 599 : |
|
|
\let\defivar = \relax |
| 600 : |
|
|
\let\defmac = \relax |
| 601 : |
|
|
\let\defmethod = \relax |
| 602 : |
|
|
\let\defop = \relax |
| 603 : |
|
|
\let\defopt = \relax |
| 604 : |
|
|
\let\defspec = \relax |
| 605 : |
|
|
\let\deftp = \relax |
| 606 : |
|
|
\let\deftypefn = \relax |
| 607 : |
|
|
\let\deftypefun = \relax |
| 608 : |
|
|
\let\deftypevar = \relax |
| 609 : |
|
|
\let\deftypevr = \relax |
| 610 : |
|
|
\let\defun = \relax |
| 611 : |
|
|
\let\defvar = \relax |
| 612 : |
|
|
\let\defvr = \relax |
| 613 : |
|
|
\let\ref = \relax |
| 614 : |
|
|
\let\xref = \relax |
| 615 : |
|
|
\let\printindex = \relax |
| 616 : |
|
|
\let\pxref = \relax |
| 617 : |
|
|
\let\settitle = \relax |
| 618 : |
|
|
\let\include = \relax |
| 619 : |
|
|
\let\lowersections = \relax |
| 620 : |
|
|
\let\down = \relax |
| 621 : |
|
|
\let\raisesections = \relax |
| 622 : |
|
|
\let\up = \relax |
| 623 : |
|
|
\let\set = \relax |
| 624 : |
|
|
\let\clear = \relax |
| 625 : |
|
|
\let\item = \relax |
| 626 : |
|
|
\let\message = \relax |
| 627 : |
|
|
} |
| 628 : |
|
|
|
| 629 : |
|
|
% Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore. |
| 630 : |
|
|
% |
| 631 : |
|
|
\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} |
| 632 : |
|
|
|
| 633 : |
|
|
% Also ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @html, @menu, and @direntry text. |
| 634 : |
|
|
% |
| 635 : |
|
|
\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} |
| 636 : |
|
|
\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} |
| 637 : |
|
|
\def\html{\doignore{html}} |
| 638 : |
|
|
\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} |
| 639 : |
|
|
\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} |
| 640 : |
|
|
|
| 641 : |
|
|
% Ignore text until a line `@end #1'. |
| 642 : |
|
|
% |
| 643 : |
|
|
\def\doignore#1{\begingroup |
| 644 : |
|
|
% Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer. |
| 645 : |
|
|
\ignoresections |
| 646 : |
|
|
% |
| 647 : |
|
|
% Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'. |
| 648 : |
|
|
\long\def\doignoretext##1\end #1{\enddoignore}% |
| 649 : |
|
|
% |
| 650 : |
|
|
% Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. |
| 651 : |
|
|
\catcode32 = 10 |
| 652 : |
|
|
% |
| 653 : |
|
|
% And now expand that command. |
| 654 : |
|
|
\doignoretext |
| 655 : |
|
|
} |
| 656 : |
|
|
|
| 657 : |
|
|
% What we do to finish off ignored text. |
| 658 : |
|
|
% |
| 659 : |
|
|
\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% |
| 660 : |
|
|
|
| 661 : |
|
|
\newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse |
| 662 : |
|
|
\def\obstexwarn{% |
| 663 : |
|
|
\ifwarnedobs\relax\else |
| 664 : |
|
|
% We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0. |
| 665 : |
|
|
% This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines. |
| 666 : |
|
|
\immediate\write16{} |
| 667 : |
|
|
\immediate\write16{***WARNING*** for users of Unix TeX 3.0!} |
| 668 : |
|
|
\immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).} |
| 669 : |
|
|
\immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.} |
| 670 : |
|
|
\immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.} |
| 671 : |
|
|
\immediate\write16{ Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.} |
| 672 : |
|
|
\immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the} |
| 673 : |
|
|
\immediate\write16{ script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution} |
| 674 : |
|
|
\immediate\write16{ to use a workaround.} |
| 675 : |
|
|
\immediate\write16{} |
| 676 : |
|
|
\warnedobstrue |
| 677 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 678 : |
|
|
} |
| 679 : |
|
|
|
| 680 : |
|
|
% **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex. For a |
| 681 : |
|
|
% workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed), |
| 682 : |
|
|
% uncomment the following line: |
| 683 : |
|
|
%%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax |
| 684 : |
|
|
|
| 685 : |
|
|
% Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for |
| 686 : |
|
|
% purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command. |
| 687 : |
|
|
% |
| 688 : |
|
|
\def\nestedignore#1{% |
| 689 : |
|
|
\obstexwarn |
| 690 : |
|
|
% We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end |
| 691 : |
|
|
% command, so that nested ignore constructs work. Thus, we put the |
| 692 : |
|
|
% text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result. To minimize |
| 693 : |
|
|
% the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on |
| 694 : |
|
|
% page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font. |
| 695 : |
|
|
% |
| 696 : |
|
|
\setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup |
| 697 : |
|
|
% Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer. |
| 698 : |
|
|
\ignoresections |
| 699 : |
|
|
% |
| 700 : |
|
|
% Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the |
| 701 : |
|
|
% @end command again. |
| 702 : |
|
|
\expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}% |
| 703 : |
|
|
% |
| 704 : |
|
|
% We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands. Most cause no |
| 705 : |
|
|
% trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do |
| 706 : |
|
|
% complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we |
| 707 : |
|
|
% undefine them. |
| 708 : |
|
|
% |
| 709 : |
|
|
% We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately; |
| 710 : |
|
|
% they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors. |
| 711 : |
|
|
\ignoremorecommands |
| 712 : |
|
|
% |
| 713 : |
|
|
% Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define |
| 714 : |
|
|
% all the font commands to also use \nullfont. We don't use |
| 715 : |
|
|
% dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites |
| 716 : |
|
|
% might have that installed. Therefore, math mode will still |
| 717 : |
|
|
% produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of |
| 718 : |
|
|
% stuff compared to the main input. |
| 719 : |
|
|
% |
| 720 : |
|
|
\nullfont |
| 721 : |
|
|
\let\tenrm = \nullfont \let\tenit = \nullfont \let\tensl = \nullfont |
| 722 : |
|
|
\let\tenbf = \nullfont \let\tentt = \nullfont \let\smallcaps = \nullfont |
| 723 : |
|
|
\let\tensf = \nullfont |
| 724 : |
|
|
% Similarly for index fonts (mostly for their use in |
| 725 : |
|
|
% smallexample) |
| 726 : |
|
|
\let\indrm = \nullfont \let\indit = \nullfont \let\indsl = \nullfont |
| 727 : |
|
|
\let\indbf = \nullfont \let\indtt = \nullfont \let\indsc = \nullfont |
| 728 : |
|
|
\let\indsf = \nullfont |
| 729 : |
|
|
% |
| 730 : |
|
|
% Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts. |
| 731 : |
|
|
\tracinglostchars = 0 |
| 732 : |
|
|
% |
| 733 : |
|
|
% Don't bother to do space factor calculations. |
| 734 : |
|
|
\frenchspacing |
| 735 : |
|
|
% |
| 736 : |
|
|
% Don't report underfull hboxes. |
| 737 : |
|
|
\hbadness = 10000 |
| 738 : |
|
|
% |
| 739 : |
|
|
% Do minimal line-breaking. |
| 740 : |
|
|
\pretolerance = 10000 |
| 741 : |
|
|
% |
| 742 : |
|
|
% Do not execute instructions in @tex |
| 743 : |
|
|
\def\tex{\doignore{tex}} |
| 744 : |
|
|
} |
| 745 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 746 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. |
| 747 : |
|
|
% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. |
| 748 : |
|
|
% |
| 749 : |
|
|
% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be |
| 750 : |
|
|
% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our |
| 751 : |
|
|
% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we |
| 752 : |
|
|
% didn't need it. |
| 753 : |
|
|
% |
| 754 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\set{\parsearg\setxxx} |
| 755 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} |
| 756 : |
|
|
\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% |
| 757 : |
|
|
\def\temp{#2}% |
| 758 : |
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty |
| 759 : |
|
|
\else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. |
| 760 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 761 : |
|
|
} |
| 762 : |
|
|
\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\xdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}} |
| 763 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 764 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. |
| 765 : |
|
|
% |
| 766 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx} |
| 767 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax} |
| 768 : |
|
|
|
| 769 : |
|
|
% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. |
| 770 : |
|
|
% |
| 771 : |
|
|
\def\value#1{\expandafter |
| 772 : |
|
|
\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax |
| 773 : |
|
|
{\{No value for ``#1''\}} |
| 774 : |
|
|
\else \csname SET#1\endcsname \fi} |
| 775 : |
|
|
|
| 776 : |
|
|
% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined |
| 777 : |
|
|
% with @set. |
| 778 : |
|
|
% |
| 779 : |
|
|
\def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx} |
| 780 : |
|
|
\def\ifsetxxx #1{% |
| 781 : |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax |
| 782 : |
|
|
\expandafter\ifsetfail |
| 783 : |
|
|
\else |
| 784 : |
|
|
\expandafter\ifsetsucceed |
| 785 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 786 : |
|
|
} |
| 787 : |
|
|
\def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}} |
| 788 : |
|
|
\def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}} |
| 789 : |
|
|
\defineunmatchedend{ifset} |
| 790 : |
|
|
|
| 791 : |
|
|
% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been |
| 792 : |
|
|
% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. |
| 793 : |
|
|
% |
| 794 : |
|
|
\def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx} |
| 795 : |
|
|
\def\ifclearxxx #1{% |
| 796 : |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax |
| 797 : |
|
|
\expandafter\ifclearsucceed |
| 798 : |
|
|
\else |
| 799 : |
|
|
\expandafter\ifclearfail |
| 800 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 801 : |
|
|
} |
| 802 : |
|
|
\def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}} |
| 803 : |
|
|
\def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}} |
| 804 : |
|
|
\defineunmatchedend{ifclear} |
| 805 : |
|
|
|
| 806 : |
|
|
% @iftex always succeeds; we read the text following, through @end |
| 807 : |
|
|
% iftex). But `@end iftex' should be valid only after an @iftex. |
| 808 : |
|
|
% |
| 809 : |
|
|
\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}} |
| 810 : |
|
|
\defineunmatchedend{iftex} |
| 811 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 812 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it |
| 813 : |
|
|
% at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no |
| 814 : |
|
|
% effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group). So we must |
| 815 : |
|
|
% define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value. (We can't |
| 816 : |
|
|
% just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since |
| 817 : |
|
|
% the @ifset might be nested.) |
| 818 : |
|
|
% |
| 819 : |
|
|
\def\conditionalsucceed#1{% |
| 820 : |
|
|
\edef\temp{% |
| 821 : |
|
|
% Remember the current value of \E#1. |
| 822 : |
|
|
\let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}% |
| 823 : |
|
|
% |
| 824 : |
|
|
% At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value. |
| 825 : |
|
|
\def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}% |
| 826 : |
|
|
}% |
| 827 : |
|
|
\temp |
| 828 : |
|
|
} |
| 829 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 830 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the |
| 831 : |
|
|
% control sequences after we've constructed them. |
| 832 : |
|
|
% |
| 833 : |
|
|
\def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} |
| 834 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 835 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. |
| 836 : |
|
|
% |
| 837 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\asis#1{#1} |
| 838 : |
|
|
|
| 839 : |
|
|
% @math means output in math mode. |
| 840 : |
|
|
% We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because control |
| 841 : |
|
|
% sequences like \math are expanded when the toc file is written. Then, |
| 842 : |
|
|
% we read the toc file back, the $'s will be normal characters (as they |
| 843 : |
|
|
% should be, according to the definition of Texinfo). So we must use a |
| 844 : |
|
|
% control sequence to switch into and out of math mode. |
| 845 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 846 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% This isn't quite enough for @math to work properly in indices, but it |
| 847 : |
|
|
% seems unlikely it will ever be needed there. |
| 848 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 849 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\let\implicitmath = $ |
| 850 : |
|
|
\def\math#1{\implicitmath #1\implicitmath} |
| 851 : |
|
|
|
| 852 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above. |
| 853 : |
|
|
\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath} |
| 854 : |
|
|
\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath} |
| 855 : |
|
|
|
| 856 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz} |
| 857 : |
|
|
\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]} |
| 858 : |
|
|
\def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} |
| 859 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\let\nwnode=\node |
| 860 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\let\lastnode=\relax |
| 861 : |
|
|
|
| 862 : |
|
|
\def\donoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else |
| 863 : |
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}\fi |
| 864 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\global\let\lastnode=\relax} |
| 865 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 866 : |
|
|
\def\unnumbnoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else |
| 867 : |
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\unnumbsetref{\lastnode}\fi |
| 868 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\global\let\lastnode=\relax} |
| 869 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 870 : |
|
|
\def\appendixnoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else |
| 871 : |
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\appendixsetref{\lastnode}\fi |
| 872 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\global\let\lastnode=\relax} |
| 873 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 874 : |
|
|
\let\refill=\relax |
| 875 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
|
| 876 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. |
| 877 : |
|
|
% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. |
| 878 : |
|
|
% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. |
| 879 : |
|
|
\def\setfilename{% |
| 880 : |
|
|
\readauxfile |
| 881 : |
|
|
\opencontents |
| 882 : |
|
|
\openindices |
| 883 : |
|
|
\fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. |
| 884 : |
|
|
\global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. |
| 885 : |
|
|
\comment % Ignore the actual filename. |
| 886 : |
|
|
} |
| 887 : |
|
|
|
| 888 : |
|
|
\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} |
| 889 : |
|
|
|
| 890 : |
|
|
\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} |
| 891 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, |
| 892 : |
|
|
node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} |
| 893 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 894 : |
|
|
\message{fonts,} |
| 895 : |
|
|
|
| 896 : |
|
|
% Font-change commands. |
| 897 : |
|
|
|
| 898 : |
|
|
% Texinfo supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. |
| 899 : |
|
|
% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc. |
| 900 : |
|
|
\newfam\sffam |
| 901 : |
|
|
\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf} |
| 902 : |
|
|
\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. |
| 903 : |
|
|
|
| 904 : |
|
|
%% Try out Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf |
| 905 : |
|
|
\let\mainmagstep=\magstephalf |
| 906 : |
|
|
|
| 907 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the |
| 908 : |
|
|
% specified font prefix (normally `cm'). |
| 909 : |
|
|
\def\setfont#1#2{\font#1=\fontprefix#2} |
| 910 : |
|
|
|
| 911 : |
|
|
% Use cm as the default font prefix. |
| 912 : |
|
|
% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix |
| 913 : |
|
|
% before you read in texinfo.tex. |
| 914 : |
|
|
\ifx\fontprefix\undefined |
| 915 : |
|
|
\def\fontprefix{cm} |
| 916 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 917 : |
|
|
|
| 918 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\ifx\bigger\relax |
| 919 : |
|
|
\let\mainmagstep=\magstep1 |
| 920 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\setfont\textrm{r12} |
| 921 : |
|
|
\setfont\texttt{tt12} |
| 922 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\else |
| 923 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\setfont\textrm{r10 scaled \mainmagstep} |
| 924 : |
|
|
\setfont\texttt{tt10 scaled \mainmagstep} |
| 925 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\fi |
| 926 : |
|
|
% Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10. |
| 927 : |
|
|
% cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10 |
| 928 : |
|
|
% looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10. |
| 929 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\setfont\textbf{b10 scaled \mainmagstep} |
| 930 : |
|
|
\setfont\textit{ti10 scaled \mainmagstep} |
| 931 : |
|
|
\setfont\textsl{sl10 scaled \mainmagstep} |
| 932 : |
|
|
\setfont\textsf{ss10 scaled \mainmagstep} |
| 933 : |
|
|
\setfont\textsc{csc10 scaled \mainmagstep} |
| 934 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep |
| 935 : |
|
|
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep |
| 936 : |
|
|
|
| 937 : |
|
|
% A few fonts for @defun, etc. |
| 938 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\setfont\defbf{bx10 scaled \magstep1} %was 1314 |
| 939 : |
|
|
\setfont\deftt{tt10 scaled \magstep1} |
| 940 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf} |
| 941 : |
|
|
|
| 942 : |
|
|
% Fonts for indices and small examples. |
| 943 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% We actually use the slanted font rather than the italic, |
| 944 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% because texinfo normally uses the slanted fonts for that. |
| 945 : |
|
|
% Do not make many font distinctions in general in the index, since they |
| 946 : |
|
|
% aren't very useful. |
| 947 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\setfont\ninett{tt9} |
| 948 : |
|
|
\setfont\indrm{r9} |
| 949 : |
|
|
\setfont\indit{sl9} |
| 950 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\let\indsl=\indit |
| 951 : |
|
|
\let\indtt=\ninett |
| 952 : |
|
|
\let\indsf=\indrm |
| 953 : |
|
|
\let\indbf=\indrm |
| 954 : |
|
|
\let\indsc=\indrm |
| 955 : |
|
|
\font\indi=cmmi9 |
| 956 : |
|
|
\font\indsy=cmsy9 |
| 957 : |
|
|
|
| 958 : |
|
|
% Fonts for headings |
| 959 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\setfont\chaprm{bx12 scaled \magstep2} |
| 960 : |
|
|
\setfont\chapit{ti12 scaled \magstep2} |
| 961 : |
|
|
\setfont\chapsl{sl12 scaled \magstep2} |
| 962 : |
|
|
\setfont\chaptt{tt12 scaled \magstep2} |
| 963 : |
|
|
\setfont\chapsf{ss12 scaled \magstep2} |
| 964 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\let\chapbf=\chaprm |
| 965 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\setfont\chapsc{csc10 scaled\magstep3} |
| 966 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 |
| 967 : |
|
|
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 |
| 968 : |
|
|
|
| 969 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\setfont\secrm{bx12 scaled \magstep1} |
| 970 : |
|
|
\setfont\secit{ti12 scaled \magstep1} |
| 971 : |
|
|
\setfont\secsl{sl12 scaled \magstep1} |
| 972 : |
|
|
\setfont\sectt{tt12 scaled \magstep1} |
| 973 : |
|
|
\setfont\secsf{ss12 scaled \magstep1} |
| 974 : |
|
|
\setfont\secbf{bx12 scaled \magstep1} |
| 975 : |
|
|
\setfont\secsc{csc10 scaled\magstep2} |
| 976 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 |
| 977 : |
|
|
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 |
| 978 : |
|
|
|
| 979 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% \setfont\ssecrm{bx10 scaled \magstep1} % This size an font looked bad. |
| 980 : |
|
|
% \setfont\ssecit{cmti10 scaled \magstep1} % The letters were too crowded. |
| 981 : |
|
|
% \setfont\ssecsl{sl10 scaled \magstep1} |
| 982 : |
|
|
% \setfont\ssectt{tt10 scaled \magstep1} |
| 983 : |
|
|
% \setfont\ssecsf{ss10 scaled \magstep1} |
| 984 : |
|
|
|
| 985 : |
|
|
%\setfont\ssecrm{b10 scaled 1315} % Note the use of cmb rather than cmbx. |
| 986 : |
|
|
%\setfont\ssecit{ti10 scaled 1315} % Also, the size is a little larger than |
| 987 : |
|
|
%\setfont\ssecsl{sl10 scaled 1315} % being scaled magstep1. |
| 988 : |
|
|
%\setfont\ssectt{tt10 scaled 1315} |
| 989 : |
|
|
%\setfont\ssecsf{ss10 scaled 1315} |
| 990 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 991 : |
|
|
%\let\ssecbf=\ssecrm |
| 992 : |
|
|
|
| 993 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\setfont\ssecrm{bx12 scaled \magstephalf} |
| 994 : |
|
|
\setfont\ssecit{ti12 scaled \magstephalf} |
| 995 : |
|
|
\setfont\ssecsl{sl12 scaled \magstephalf} |
| 996 : |
|
|
\setfont\ssectt{tt12 scaled \magstephalf} |
| 997 : |
|
|
\setfont\ssecsf{ss12 scaled \magstephalf} |
| 998 : |
|
|
\setfont\ssecbf{bx12 scaled \magstephalf} |
| 999 : |
|
|
\setfont\ssecsc{csc10 scaled \magstep1} |
| 1000 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf |
| 1001 : |
|
|
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 |
| 1002 : |
|
|
% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5, |
| 1003 : |
|
|
% but that is not a standard magnification. |
| 1004 : |
|
|
|
| 1005 : |
|
|
% Fonts for title page: |
| 1006 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\setfont\titlerm{bx12 scaled \magstep3} |
| 1007 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\let\authorrm = \secrm |
| 1008 : |
|
|
|
| 1009 : |
|
|
% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, |
| 1010 : |
|
|
% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since |
| 1011 : |
|
|
% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we |
| 1012 : |
|
|
% don't bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont (which would |
| 1013 : |
|
|
% also require loading a lot more fonts). |
| 1014 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 1015 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\resetmathfonts{% |
| 1016 : |
|
|
\textfont0 = \tenrm \textfont1 = \teni \textfont2 = \tensy |
| 1017 : |
|
|
\textfont\itfam = \tenit \textfont\slfam = \tensl \textfont\bffam = \tenbf |
| 1018 : |
|
|
\textfont\ttfam = \tentt \textfont\sffam = \tensf |
| 1019 : |
|
|
} |
| 1020 : |
|
|
|
| 1021 : |
|
|
|
| 1022 : |
|
|
% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead |
| 1023 : |
|
|
% of just \STYLE. We do this so that font changes will continue to work |
| 1024 : |
|
|
% in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most |
| 1025 : |
|
|
% cases, not the current. Plain TeX does, for example, |
| 1026 : |
|
|
% \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \tenbf} By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need |
| 1027 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% to redefine \bf itself. |
| 1028 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\textfonts{% |
| 1029 : |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl |
| 1030 : |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc |
| 1031 : |
|
|
\let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy |
| 1032 : |
|
|
\resetmathfonts} |
| 1033 : |
|
|
\def\chapfonts{% |
| 1034 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl |
| 1035 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc |
| 1036 : |
|
|
\let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy |
| 1037 : |
|
|
\resetmathfonts} |
| 1038 : |
|
|
\def\secfonts{% |
| 1039 : |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl |
| 1040 : |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc |
| 1041 : |
|
|
\let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy |
| 1042 : |
|
|
\resetmathfonts} |
| 1043 : |
|
|
\def\subsecfonts{% |
| 1044 : |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl |
| 1045 : |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc |
| 1046 : |
|
|
\let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy |
| 1047 : |
|
|
\resetmathfonts} |
| 1048 : |
|
|
\def\indexfonts{% |
| 1049 : |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\indrm \let\tenit=\indit \let\tensl=\indsl |
| 1050 : |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\indbf \let\tentt=\indtt \let\smallcaps=\indsc |
| 1051 : |
|
|
\let\tensf=\indsf \let\teni=\indi \let\tensy=\indsy |
| 1052 : |
|
|
\resetmathfonts} |
| 1053 : |
|
|
|
| 1054 : |
|
|
% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. |
| 1055 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 1056 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\textfonts |
| 1057 : |
|
|
|
| 1058 : |
|
|
% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks |
| 1059 : |
|
|
\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 |
| 1060 : |
|
|
|
| 1061 : |
|
|
% Fonts for short table of contents. |
| 1062 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\setfont\shortcontrm{r12} |
| 1063 : |
|
|
\setfont\shortcontbf{bx12} |
| 1064 : |
|
|
\setfont\shortcontsl{sl12} |
| 1065 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 1066 : |
|
|
%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans |
| 1067 : |
|
|
%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic |
| 1068 : |
|
|
|
| 1069 : |
|
|
% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction |
| 1070 : |
|
|
% unless the following character is such as not to need one. |
| 1071 : |
|
|
\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi} |
| 1072 : |
|
|
\def\smartitalic#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} |
| 1073 : |
|
|
|
| 1074 : |
|
|
\let\i=\smartitalic |
| 1075 : |
|
|
\let\var=\smartitalic |
| 1076 : |
|
|
\let\dfn=\smartitalic |
| 1077 : |
|
|
\let\emph=\smartitalic |
| 1078 : |
|
|
\let\cite=\smartitalic |
| 1079 : |
|
|
|
| 1080 : |
|
|
\def\b#1{{\bf #1}} |
| 1081 : |
|
|
\let\strong=\b |
| 1082 : |
|
|
|
| 1083 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at |
| 1084 : |
|
|
% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the |
| 1085 : |
|
|
% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. |
| 1086 : |
|
|
% |
| 1087 : |
|
|
\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} |
| 1088 : |
|
|
\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } |
| 1089 : |
|
|
|
| 1090 : |
|
|
\def\t#1{% |
| 1091 : |
|
|
{\tt \nohyphenation \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}% |
| 1092 : |
|
|
\null |
| 1093 : |
|
|
} |
| 1094 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\let\ttfont = \t |
| 1095 : |
|
|
%\def\samp #1{`{\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}'\null} |
| 1096 : |
|
|
\def\samp #1{`\tclose{#1}'\null} |
| 1097 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\key #1{{\tt \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} |
| 1098 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} |
| 1099 : |
|
|
|
| 1100 : |
|
|
\let\file=\samp |
| 1101 : |
|
|
|
| 1102 : |
|
|
% @code is a modification of @t, |
| 1103 : |
|
|
% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. |
| 1104 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\tclose#1{% |
| 1105 : |
|
|
{% |
| 1106 : |
|
|
% Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. |
| 1107 : |
|
|
\spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font |
| 1108 : |
|
|
% |
| 1109 : |
|
|
% Switch to typewriter. |
| 1110 : |
|
|
\tt |
| 1111 : |
|
|
% |
| 1112 : |
|
|
% But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. |
| 1113 : |
|
|
\def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% |
| 1114 : |
|
|
% |
| 1115 : |
|
|
% Turn off hyphenation. |
| 1116 : |
|
|
\nohyphenation |
| 1117 : |
|
|
% |
| 1118 : |
|
|
\rawbackslash |
| 1119 : |
|
|
\frenchspacing |
| 1120 : |
|
|
#1% |
| 1121 : |
|
|
}% |
| 1122 : |
|
|
\null |
| 1123 : |
|
|
} |
| 1124 : |
|
|
|
| 1125 : |
|
|
% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code. |
| 1126 : |
|
|
% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overful hboxes |
| 1127 : |
|
|
% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. |
| 1128 : |
|
|
|
| 1129 : |
|
|
% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control |
| 1130 : |
|
|
% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. |
| 1131 : |
|
|
% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) |
| 1132 : |
|
|
% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate an a dash. |
| 1133 : |
|
|
% -- rms. |
| 1134 : |
|
|
{ |
| 1135 : |
|
|
\catcode`\-=\active |
| 1136 : |
|
|
\catcode`\_=\active |
| 1137 : |
|
|
\global\def\code{\begingroup \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder \codex} |
| 1138 : |
|
|
% The following is used by \doprintindex to insure that long function names |
| 1139 : |
|
|
% wrap around. It is necessary for - and _ to be active before the index is |
| 1140 : |
|
|
% read from the file, as \entry parses the arguments long before \code is |
| 1141 : |
|
|
% ever called. -- mycroft |
| 1142 : |
|
|
\global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash \catcode`\_=\active \let_\realunder} |
| 1143 : |
|
|
} |
| 1144 : |
|
|
\def\realdash{-} |
| 1145 : |
|
|
\def\realunder{_} |
| 1146 : |
|
|
\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} |
| 1147 : |
|
|
\def\codeunder{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}} |
| 1148 : |
|
|
\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} |
| 1149 : |
|
|
|
| 1150 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
%\let\exp=\tclose %Was temporary |
| 1151 : |
|
|
|
| 1152 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, |
| 1153 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% then @kbd has no effect. |
| 1154 : |
|
|
|
| 1155 : |
|
|
\def\xkey{\key} |
| 1156 : |
|
|
\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% |
| 1157 : |
|
|
\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% |
| 1158 : |
|
|
\else\tclose{\look}\fi |
| 1159 : |
|
|
\else\tclose{\look}\fi} |
| 1160 : |
|
|
|
| 1161 : |
|
|
% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the |
| 1162 : |
|
|
% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of |
| 1163 : |
|
|
% @dmn{}pt. |
| 1164 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 1165 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} |
| 1166 : |
|
|
|
| 1167 : |
|
|
\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par} |
| 1168 : |
|
|
|
| 1169 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} % |
| 1170 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 1171 : |
|
|
\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font |
| 1172 : |
|
|
% Use of \lowercase was suggested. |
| 1173 : |
|
|
\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font |
| 1174 : |
|
|
\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font |
| 1175 : |
|
|
|
| 1176 : |
|
|
\message{page headings,} |
| 1177 : |
|
|
|
| 1178 : |
|
|
\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in |
| 1179 : |
|
|
\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc |
| 1180 : |
|
|
|
| 1181 : |
|
|
% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. |
| 1182 : |
|
|
\def\titlefont#1{{\titlerm #1}} |
| 1183 : |
|
|
|
| 1184 : |
|
|
\newif\ifseenauthor |
| 1185 : |
|
|
\newif\iffinishedtitlepage |
| 1186 : |
|
|
|
| 1187 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz} |
| 1188 : |
|
|
\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% |
| 1189 : |
|
|
\endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} |
| 1190 : |
|
|
|
| 1191 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts |
| 1192 : |
|
|
\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm |
| 1193 : |
|
|
% I deinstalled the following change because \cmr12 is undefined. |
| 1194 : |
|
|
% This change was not in the ChangeLog anyway. --rms. |
| 1195 : |
|
|
% \let\subtitlerm=\cmr12 |
| 1196 : |
|
|
\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}% |
| 1197 : |
|
|
% |
| 1198 : |
|
|
\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}% |
| 1199 : |
|
|
% |
| 1200 : |
|
|
% Leave some space at the very top of the page. |
| 1201 : |
|
|
\vglue\titlepagetopglue |
| 1202 : |
|
|
% |
| 1203 : |
|
|
% Now you can print the title using @title. |
| 1204 : |
|
|
\def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}% |
| 1205 : |
|
|
\def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefont{##1}} |
| 1206 : |
|
|
% print a rule at the page bottom also. |
| 1207 : |
|
|
\finishedtitlepagefalse |
| 1208 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}% |
| 1209 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. |
| 1210 : |
|
|
\finishedtitlepagetrue |
| 1211 : |
|
|
% |
| 1212 : |
|
|
% Now you can put text using @subtitle. |
| 1213 : |
|
|
\def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}% |
| 1214 : |
|
|
\def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}% |
| 1215 : |
|
|
% |
| 1216 : |
|
|
% @author should come last, but may come many times. |
| 1217 : |
|
|
\def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}% |
| 1218 : |
|
|
\def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi |
| 1219 : |
|
|
{\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}% |
| 1220 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 1221 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space |
| 1222 : |
|
|
% at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. |
| 1223 : |
|
|
\let\oldpage = \page |
| 1224 : |
|
|
\def\page{% |
| 1225 : |
|
|
\iffinishedtitlepage\else |
| 1226 : |
|
|
\finishtitlepage |
| 1227 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 1228 : |
|
|
\oldpage |
| 1229 : |
|
|
\let\page = \oldpage |
| 1230 : |
|
|
\hbox{}}% |
| 1231 : |
|
|
% \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}} |
| 1232 : |
|
|
} |
| 1233 : |
|
|
|
| 1234 : |
|
|
\def\Etitlepage{% |
| 1235 : |
|
|
\iffinishedtitlepage\else |
| 1236 : |
|
|
\finishtitlepage |
| 1237 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 1238 : |
|
|
% It is important to do the page break before ending the group, |
| 1239 : |
|
|
% because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. |
| 1240 : |
|
|
% If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page |
| 1241 : |
|
|
% after the title page, which we certainly don't want. |
| 1242 : |
|
|
\oldpage |
| 1243 : |
|
|
\endgroup |
| 1244 : |
|
|
\HEADINGSon |
| 1245 : |
|
|
} |
| 1246 : |
|
|
|
| 1247 : |
|
|
\def\finishtitlepage{% |
| 1248 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize |
| 1249 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\vskip\titlepagebottomglue |
| 1250 : |
|
|
\finishedtitlepagetrue |
| 1251 : |
|
|
} |
| 1252 : |
|
|
|
| 1253 : |
|
|
%%% Set up page headings and footings. |
| 1254 : |
|
|
|
| 1255 : |
|
|
\let\thispage=\folio |
| 1256 : |
|
|
|
| 1257 : |
|
|
\newtoks \evenheadline % Token sequence for heading line of even pages |
| 1258 : |
|
|
\newtoks \oddheadline % Token sequence for heading line of odd pages |
| 1259 : |
|
|
\newtoks \evenfootline % Token sequence for footing line of even pages |
| 1260 : |
|
|
\newtoks \oddfootline % Token sequence for footing line of odd pages |
| 1261 : |
|
|
|
| 1262 : |
|
|
% Now make Tex use those variables |
| 1263 : |
|
|
\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline |
| 1264 : |
|
|
\else \the\evenheadline \fi}} |
| 1265 : |
|
|
\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline |
| 1266 : |
|
|
\else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} |
| 1267 : |
|
|
\let\HEADINGShook=\relax |
| 1268 : |
|
|
|
| 1269 : |
|
|
% Commands to set those variables. |
| 1270 : |
|
|
% For example, this is what @headings on does |
| 1271 : |
|
|
% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter |
| 1272 : |
|
|
% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle |
| 1273 : |
|
|
% @evenfooting @thisfile|| |
| 1274 : |
|
|
% @oddfooting ||@thisfile |
| 1275 : |
|
|
|
| 1276 : |
|
|
\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} |
| 1277 : |
|
|
\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} |
| 1278 : |
|
|
\def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx} |
| 1279 : |
|
|
|
| 1280 : |
|
|
\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} |
| 1281 : |
|
|
\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} |
| 1282 : |
|
|
\def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx} |
| 1283 : |
|
|
|
| 1284 : |
|
|
{\catcode`\@=0 % |
| 1285 : |
|
|
|
| 1286 : |
|
|
\gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} |
| 1287 : |
|
|
\gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% |
| 1288 : |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
| 1289 : |
|
|
|
| 1290 : |
|
|
\gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} |
| 1291 : |
|
|
\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% |
| 1292 : |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
| 1293 : |
|
|
|
| 1294 : |
|
|
\gdef\everyheadingxxx #1{\everyheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} |
| 1295 : |
|
|
\gdef\everyheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% |
| 1296 : |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}} |
| 1297 : |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
| 1298 : |
|
|
|
| 1299 : |
|
|
\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} |
| 1300 : |
|
|
\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% |
| 1301 : |
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
| 1302 : |
|
|
|
| 1303 : |
|
|
\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} |
| 1304 : |
|
|
\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% |
| 1305 : |
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
| 1306 : |
|
|
|
| 1307 : |
|
|
\gdef\everyfootingxxx #1{\everyfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} |
| 1308 : |
|
|
\gdef\everyfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% |
| 1309 : |
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}} |
| 1310 : |
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
| 1311 : |
|
|
% |
| 1312 : |
|
|
}% unbind the catcode of @. |
| 1313 : |
|
|
|
| 1314 : |
|
|
% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. |
| 1315 : |
|
|
% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. |
| 1316 : |
|
|
% @headings off turns them off. |
| 1317 : |
|
|
% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. |
| 1318 : |
|
|
% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. |
| 1319 : |
|
|
% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. |
| 1320 : |
|
|
% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. |
| 1321 : |
|
|
% By default, they are off. |
| 1322 : |
|
|
|
| 1323 : |
|
|
\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} |
| 1324 : |
|
|
|
| 1325 : |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSoff{ |
| 1326 : |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
| 1327 : |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} |
| 1328 : |
|
|
\HEADINGSoff |
| 1329 : |
|
|
% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. |
| 1330 : |
|
|
% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, |
| 1331 : |
|
|
% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document |
| 1332 : |
|
|
% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top |
| 1333 : |
|
|
% edge of all pages. |
| 1334 : |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSdouble{ |
| 1335 : |
|
|
%\pagealignmacro |
| 1336 : |
|
|
\global\pageno=1 |
| 1337 : |
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
| 1338 : |
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil} |
| 1339 : |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} |
| 1340 : |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
| 1341 : |
|
|
} |
| 1342 : |
|
|
% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, |
| 1343 : |
|
|
% page number on top right. |
| 1344 : |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSsingle{ |
| 1345 : |
|
|
%\pagealignmacro |
| 1346 : |
|
|
\global\pageno=1 |
| 1347 : |
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
| 1348 : |
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil} |
| 1349 : |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
| 1350 : |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
| 1351 : |
|
|
} |
| 1352 : |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} |
| 1353 : |
|
|
|
| 1354 : |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} |
| 1355 : |
|
|
\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter |
| 1356 : |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSdoublex{% |
| 1357 : |
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
| 1358 : |
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil} |
| 1359 : |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} |
| 1360 : |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
| 1361 : |
|
|
} |
| 1362 : |
|
|
|
| 1363 : |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} |
| 1364 : |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSsinglex{% |
| 1365 : |
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
| 1366 : |
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil} |
| 1367 : |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
| 1368 : |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
| 1369 : |
|
|
} |
| 1370 : |
|
|
|
| 1371 : |
|
|
% Subroutines used in generating headings |
| 1372 : |
|
|
% Produces Day Month Year style of output. |
| 1373 : |
|
|
\def\today{\number\day\space |
| 1374 : |
|
|
\ifcase\month\or |
| 1375 : |
|
|
January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or |
| 1376 : |
|
|
July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi |
| 1377 : |
|
|
\space\number\year} |
| 1378 : |
|
|
|
| 1379 : |
|
|
% Use this if you want the Month Day, Year style of output. |
| 1380 : |
|
|
%\def\today{\ifcase\month\or |
| 1381 : |
|
|
%January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or |
| 1382 : |
|
|
%July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi |
| 1383 : |
|
|
%\space\number\day, \number\year} |
| 1384 : |
|
|
|
| 1385 : |
|
|
% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings |
| 1386 : |
|
|
% It generates no output of its own |
| 1387 : |
|
|
|
| 1388 : |
|
|
\def\thistitle{No Title} |
| 1389 : |
|
|
\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz} |
| 1390 : |
|
|
\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}} |
| 1391 : |
|
|
|
| 1392 : |
|
|
\message{tables,} |
| 1393 : |
|
|
|
| 1394 : |
|
|
% @tabs -- simple alignment |
| 1395 : |
|
|
|
| 1396 : |
|
|
% These don't work. For one thing, \+ is defined as outer. |
| 1397 : |
|
|
% So these macros cannot even be defined. |
| 1398 : |
|
|
|
| 1399 : |
|
|
%\def\tabs{\parsearg\tabszzz} |
| 1400 : |
|
|
%\def\tabszzz #1{\settabs\+#1\cr} |
| 1401 : |
|
|
%\def\tabline{\parsearg\tablinezzz} |
| 1402 : |
|
|
%\def\tablinezzz #1{\+#1\cr} |
| 1403 : |
|
|
%\def\&{&} |
| 1404 : |
|
|
|
| 1405 : |
|
|
% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x). |
| 1406 : |
|
|
|
| 1407 : |
|
|
% default indentation of table text |
| 1408 : |
|
|
\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in |
| 1409 : |
|
|
% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text |
| 1410 : |
|
|
\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in |
| 1411 : |
|
|
% margin between end of table item and start of table text. |
| 1412 : |
|
|
\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in |
| 1413 : |
|
|
|
| 1414 : |
|
|
% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin |
| 1415 : |
|
|
\newdimen\itemmax |
| 1416 : |
|
|
|
| 1417 : |
|
|
% Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with |
| 1418 : |
|
|
% these defs. |
| 1419 : |
|
|
% They also define \itemindex |
| 1420 : |
|
|
% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). |
| 1421 : |
|
|
|
| 1422 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip |
| 1423 : |
|
|
|
| 1424 : |
|
|
\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} |
| 1425 : |
|
|
|
| 1426 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} |
| 1427 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} |
| 1428 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 1429 : |
|
|
\def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz} |
| 1430 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz} |
| 1431 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 1432 : |
|
|
\def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz} |
| 1433 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz} |
| 1434 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 1435 : |
|
|
\def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}% |
| 1436 : |
|
|
\itemzzz {#1}} |
| 1437 : |
|
|
|
| 1438 : |
|
|
\def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}% |
| 1439 : |
|
|
\itemzzz {#1}} |
| 1440 : |
|
|
|
| 1441 : |
|
|
\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % |
| 1442 : |
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\rightskip |
| 1443 : |
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\tableindent |
| 1444 : |
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}% |
| 1445 : |
|
|
\itemindex{#1}% |
| 1446 : |
|
|
\nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. |
| 1447 : |
|
|
% |
| 1448 : |
|
|
% Be sure we are not still in the middle of a paragraph. |
| 1449 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
%{\parskip = 0in |
| 1450 : |
|
|
%\par |
| 1451 : |
|
|
%}% |
| 1452 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% |
| 1453 : |
|
|
% If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line |
| 1454 : |
|
|
% by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that |
| 1455 : |
|
|
% line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next |
| 1456 : |
|
|
% command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the |
| 1457 : |
|
|
% horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. |
| 1458 : |
|
|
\ifdim \wd0>\itemmax |
| 1459 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 1460 : |
|
|
% Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, |
| 1461 : |
|
|
% but leave it ragged-right. |
| 1462 : |
|
|
\begingroup |
| 1463 : |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by-\tableindent |
| 1464 : |
|
|
\advance\hsize by\tableindent |
| 1465 : |
|
|
\advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil |
| 1466 : |
|
|
\leavevmode\unhbox0\par |
| 1467 : |
|
|
\endgroup |
| 1468 : |
|
|
% |
| 1469 : |
|
|
% We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the |
| 1470 : |
|
|
% \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. |
| 1471 : |
|
|
\nobreak \vskip-\parskip |
| 1472 : |
|
|
% |
| 1473 : |
|
|
% Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. Unfortunately |
| 1474 : |
|
|
% we can't prevent a possible page break at the following |
| 1475 : |
|
|
% \baselineskip glue. |
| 1476 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\nobreak |
| 1477 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\endgroup |
| 1478 : |
|
|
\itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse |
| 1479 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\else |
| 1480 : |
|
|
% The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the |
| 1481 : |
|
|
% following text (if any) will end up on the same line. Since that |
| 1482 : |
|
|
% text will be indented by \tableindent, we make the item text be in |
| 1483 : |
|
|
% a zero-width box. |
| 1484 : |
|
|
\noindent |
| 1485 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\rlap{\hskip -\tableindent\box0}\ignorespaces% |
| 1486 : |
|
|
\endgroup% |
| 1487 : |
|
|
\itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue% |
| 1488 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\fi |
| 1489 : |
|
|
} |
| 1490 : |
|
|
|
| 1491 : |
|
|
\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}} |
| 1492 : |
|
|
\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}} |
| 1493 : |
|
|
\def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}} |
| 1494 : |
|
|
\def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}} |
| 1495 : |
|
|
\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}} |
| 1496 : |
|
|
\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}} |
| 1497 : |
|
|
|
| 1498 : |
|
|
%% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work |
| 1499 : |
|
|
\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}} |
| 1500 : |
|
|
|
| 1501 : |
|
|
\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex} |
| 1502 : |
|
|
{\obeylines\obeyspaces% |
| 1503 : |
|
|
\gdef\tablex #1^^M{% |
| 1504 : |
|
|
\tabley\dontindex#1 \endtabley}} |
| 1505 : |
|
|
|
| 1506 : |
|
|
\def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex} |
| 1507 : |
|
|
{\obeylines\obeyspaces% |
| 1508 : |
|
|
\gdef\ftablex #1^^M{% |
| 1509 : |
|
|
\tabley\fnitemindex#1 \endtabley |
| 1510 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% |
| 1511 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\let\Etable=\relax}} |
| 1512 : |
|
|
|
| 1513 : |
|
|
\def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex} |
| 1514 : |
|
|
{\obeylines\obeyspaces% |
| 1515 : |
|
|
\gdef\vtablex #1^^M{% |
| 1516 : |
|
|
\tabley\vritemindex#1 \endtabley |
| 1517 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% |
| 1518 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\let\Etable=\relax}} |
| 1519 : |
|
|
|
| 1520 : |
|
|
\def\dontindex #1{} |
| 1521 : |
|
|
\def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}% |
| 1522 : |
|
|
\def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}% |
| 1523 : |
|
|
|
| 1524 : |
|
|
{\obeyspaces % |
| 1525 : |
|
|
\gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup% |
| 1526 : |
|
|
\tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}} |
| 1527 : |
|
|
|
| 1528 : |
|
|
\def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{% |
| 1529 : |
|
|
\aboveenvbreak % |
| 1530 : |
|
|
\begingroup % |
| 1531 : |
|
|
\def\Edescription{\Etable}% Neccessary kludge. |
| 1532 : |
|
|
\let\itemindex=#1% |
| 1533 : |
|
|
\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi % |
| 1534 : |
|
|
\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi % |
| 1535 : |
|
|
\ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi % |
| 1536 : |
|
|
\def\itemfont{#2}% |
| 1537 : |
|
|
\itemmax=\tableindent % |
| 1538 : |
|
|
\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin % |
| 1539 : |
|
|
\advance \leftskip by \tableindent % |
| 1540 : |
|
|
\exdentamount=\tableindent |
| 1541 : |
|
|
\parindent = 0pt |
| 1542 : |
|
|
\parskip = \smallskipamount |
| 1543 : |
|
|
\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi% |
| 1544 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% |
| 1545 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\let\item = \internalBitem % |
| 1546 : |
|
|
\let\itemx = \internalBitemx % |
| 1547 : |
|
|
\let\kitem = \internalBkitem % |
| 1548 : |
|
|
\let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx % |
| 1549 : |
|
|
\let\xitem = \internalBxitem % |
| 1550 : |
|
|
\let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx % |
| 1551 : |
|
|
} |
| 1552 : |
|
|
|
| 1553 : |
|
|
% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize |
| 1554 : |
|
|
|
| 1555 : |
|
|
\newcount \itemno |
| 1556 : |
|
|
|
| 1557 : |
|
|
\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz} |
| 1558 : |
|
|
|
| 1559 : |
|
|
\def\itemizezzz #1{% |
| 1560 : |
|
|
\begingroup % ended by the @end itemsize |
| 1561 : |
|
|
\itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize} |
| 1562 : |
|
|
} |
| 1563 : |
|
|
|
| 1564 : |
|
|
\def\itemizey #1#2{% |
| 1565 : |
|
|
\aboveenvbreak % |
| 1566 : |
|
|
\itemmax=\itemindent % |
| 1567 : |
|
|
\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin % |
| 1568 : |
|
|
\advance \leftskip by \itemindent % |
| 1569 : |
|
|
\exdentamount=\itemindent |
| 1570 : |
|
|
\parindent = 0pt % |
| 1571 : |
|
|
\parskip = \smallskipamount % |
| 1572 : |
|
|
\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi% |
| 1573 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% |
| 1574 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\itemcontents{#1}% |
| 1575 : |
|
|
\let\item=\itemizeitem} |
| 1576 : |
|
|
|
| 1577 : |
|
|
% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. |
| 1578 : |
|
|
% These are `.?!:;,' |
| 1579 : |
|
|
\def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000 |
| 1580 : |
|
|
\sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 } |
| 1581 : |
|
|
|
| 1582 : |
|
|
% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in |
| 1583 : |
|
|
% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. |
| 1584 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 1585 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% |
| 1586 : |
|
|
|
| 1587 : |
|
|
% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, |
| 1588 : |
|
|
% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No |
| 1589 : |
|
|
% argument is the same as `1'. |
| 1590 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 1591 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz} |
| 1592 : |
|
|
\def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} |
| 1593 : |
|
|
\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% |
| 1594 : |
|
|
\begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate |
| 1595 : |
|
|
% |
| 1596 : |
|
|
% If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. |
| 1597 : |
|
|
\def\thearg{#1}% |
| 1598 : |
|
|
\ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi |
| 1599 : |
|
|
% |
| 1600 : |
|
|
% Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a |
| 1601 : |
|
|
% letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. |
| 1602 : |
|
|
% (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. |
| 1603 : |
|
|
% This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at |
| 1604 : |
|
|
% all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) |
| 1605 : |
|
|
\expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark |
| 1606 : |
|
|
\ifx\rest\empty |
| 1607 : |
|
|
% Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. |
| 1608 : |
|
|
% A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. |
| 1609 : |
|
|
% An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and |
| 1610 : |
|
|
% not equal to itself. |
| 1611 : |
|
|
% Otherwise, we assume it's a number. |
| 1612 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 1613 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from |
| 1614 : |
|
|
% continuing to look for a <number>. |
| 1615 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 1616 : |
|
|
\ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax |
| 1617 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\numericenumerate % a number (we hope) |
| 1618 : |
|
|
\else |
| 1619 : |
|
|
% It's a letter. |
| 1620 : |
|
|
\ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax |
| 1621 : |
|
|
\lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter |
| 1622 : |
|
|
\else |
| 1623 : |
|
|
\uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter |
| 1624 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 1625 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 1626 : |
|
|
\else |
| 1627 : |
|
|
% Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. |
| 1628 : |
|
|
\numericenumerate |
| 1629 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 1630 : |
|
|
} |
| 1631 : |
|
|
|
| 1632 : |
|
|
% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is |
| 1633 : |
|
|
% given in \thearg. |
| 1634 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 1635 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\numericenumerate{% |
| 1636 : |
|
|
\itemno = \thearg |
| 1637 : |
|
|
\startenumeration{\the\itemno}% |
| 1638 : |
|
|
} |
| 1639 : |
|
|
|
| 1640 : |
|
|
% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. |
| 1641 : |
|
|
\def\lowercaseenumerate{% |
| 1642 : |
|
|
\itemno = \expandafter`\thearg |
| 1643 : |
|
|
\startenumeration{% |
| 1644 : |
|
|
% Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. |
| 1645 : |
|
|
\ifnum\itemno=0 |
| 1646 : |
|
|
\errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger |
| 1647 : |
|
|
alphabet}% |
| 1648 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 1649 : |
|
|
\char\lccode\itemno |
| 1650 : |
|
|
}% |
| 1651 : |
|
|
} |
| 1652 : |
|
|
|
| 1653 : |
|
|
% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. |
| 1654 : |
|
|
\def\uppercaseenumerate{% |
| 1655 : |
|
|
\itemno = \expandafter`\thearg |
| 1656 : |
|
|
\startenumeration{% |
| 1657 : |
|
|
% Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. |
| 1658 : |
|
|
\ifnum\itemno=0 |
| 1659 : |
|
|
\errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger |
| 1660 : |
|
|
alphabet} |
| 1661 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 1662 : |
|
|
\char\uccode\itemno |
| 1663 : |
|
|
}% |
| 1664 : |
|
|
} |
| 1665 : |
|
|
|
| 1666 : |
|
|
% Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the |
| 1667 : |
|
|
% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in |
| 1668 : |
|
|
% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. |
| 1669 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 1670 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\startenumeration#1{% |
| 1671 : |
|
|
\advance\itemno by -1 |
| 1672 : |
|
|
\itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr |
| 1673 : |
|
|
} |
| 1674 : |
|
|
|
| 1675 : |
|
|
% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg |
| 1676 : |
|
|
% to @enumerate. |
| 1677 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 1678 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} |
| 1679 : |
|
|
\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} |
| 1680 : |
|
|
\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} |
| 1681 : |
|
|
\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} |
| 1682 : |
|
|
|
| 1683 : |
|
|
% Definition of @item while inside @itemize. |
| 1684 : |
|
|
|
| 1685 : |
|
|
\def\itemizeitem{% |
| 1686 : |
|
|
\advance\itemno by 1 |
| 1687 : |
|
|
{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% |
| 1688 : |
|
|
\ifhmode \errmessage{\in hmode at itemizeitem}\fi |
| 1689 : |
|
|
{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt |
| 1690 : |
|
|
\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}% |
| 1691 : |
|
|
\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% |
| 1692 : |
|
|
\flushcr} |
| 1693 : |
|
|
|
| 1694 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% @multitable macros |
| 1695 : |
|
|
% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94 |
| 1696 : |
|
|
% |
| 1697 : |
|
|
% @multitable ... @endmultitable will make as many columns as desired. |
| 1698 : |
|
|
% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width |
| 1699 : |
|
|
% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, |
| 1700 : |
|
|
% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. |
| 1701 : |
|
|
|
| 1702 : |
|
|
% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. |
| 1703 : |
|
|
|
| 1704 : |
|
|
% To make preamble: |
| 1705 : |
|
|
% |
| 1706 : |
|
|
% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: |
| 1707 : |
|
|
% @multitable @percentofhsize .2 .3 .5 |
| 1708 : |
|
|
% @item ... |
| 1709 : |
|
|
% |
| 1710 : |
|
|
% Numbers following @percentofhsize are the percent of the total |
| 1711 : |
|
|
% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many |
| 1712 : |
|
|
% columns as desired. |
| 1713 : |
|
|
|
| 1714 : |
|
|
% Or use a template: |
| 1715 : |
|
|
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} |
| 1716 : |
|
|
% @item ... |
| 1717 : |
|
|
% using the widest term desired in each column. |
| 1718 : |
|
|
|
| 1719 : |
|
|
|
| 1720 : |
|
|
% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column |
| 1721 : |
|
|
% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's |
| 1722 : |
|
|
% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, |
| 1723 : |
|
|
% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. |
| 1724 : |
|
|
|
| 1725 : |
|
|
% @item, @tab, @multicolumn or @endmulticolumn do not need to be on their |
| 1726 : |
|
|
% own lines, but it will not hurt if they are. |
| 1727 : |
|
|
|
| 1728 : |
|
|
% Sample multitable: |
| 1729 : |
|
|
|
| 1730 : |
|
|
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} |
| 1731 : |
|
|
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col |
| 1732 : |
|
|
% @item |
| 1733 : |
|
|
% first col stuff |
| 1734 : |
|
|
% @tab |
| 1735 : |
|
|
% second col stuff |
| 1736 : |
|
|
% @tab |
| 1737 : |
|
|
% third col |
| 1738 : |
|
|
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff |
| 1739 : |
|
|
% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. |
| 1740 : |
|
|
% |
| 1741 : |
|
|
% They will wrap at the width determined by the template. |
| 1742 : |
|
|
% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. |
| 1743 : |
|
|
% @endmultitable |
| 1744 : |
|
|
|
| 1745 : |
|
|
% Default dimensions may be reset by user. |
| 1746 : |
|
|
% @intableparskip will set vertical space between paragraphs in table. |
| 1747 : |
|
|
% @intableparindent will set paragraph indent in table. |
| 1748 : |
|
|
% @spacebetweencols will set horizontal space to be left between columns. |
| 1749 : |
|
|
% @spacebetweenlines will set vertical space to be left between lines. |
| 1750 : |
|
|
|
| 1751 : |
|
|
%%%% |
| 1752 : |
|
|
% Dimensions |
| 1753 : |
|
|
|
| 1754 : |
|
|
\newdimen\intableparskip |
| 1755 : |
|
|
\newdimen\intableparindent |
| 1756 : |
|
|
\newdimen\spacebetweencols |
| 1757 : |
|
|
\newdimen\spacebetweenlines |
| 1758 : |
|
|
\intableparskip=0pt |
| 1759 : |
|
|
\intableparindent=6pt |
| 1760 : |
|
|
\spacebetweencols=12pt |
| 1761 : |
|
|
\spacebetweenlines=12pt |
| 1762 : |
|
|
|
| 1763 : |
|
|
%%%% |
| 1764 : |
|
|
% Macros used to set up halign preamble: |
| 1765 : |
|
|
\let\endsetuptable\relax |
| 1766 : |
|
|
\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} |
| 1767 : |
|
|
\let\percentofhsize\relax |
| 1768 : |
|
|
\def\xpercentofhsize{\percentofhsize} |
| 1769 : |
|
|
\newif\ifsetpercent |
| 1770 : |
|
|
|
| 1771 : |
|
|
\newcount\colcount |
| 1772 : |
|
|
\def\setuptable#1{\def\firstarg{#1}% |
| 1773 : |
|
|
\ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable\let\go\relax% |
| 1774 : |
|
|
\else |
| 1775 : |
|
|
\ifx\firstarg\xpercentofhsize\global\setpercenttrue% |
| 1776 : |
|
|
\else |
| 1777 : |
|
|
\ifsetpercent |
| 1778 : |
|
|
\if#1.\else% |
| 1779 : |
|
|
\global\advance\colcount by1 % |
| 1780 : |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#1\hsize}% |
| 1781 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 1782 : |
|
|
\else |
| 1783 : |
|
|
\global\advance\colcount by1 |
| 1784 : |
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{#1}% |
| 1785 : |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% |
| 1786 : |
|
|
\fi% |
| 1787 : |
|
|
\fi% |
| 1788 : |
|
|
\let\go\setuptable% |
| 1789 : |
|
|
\fi\go} |
| 1790 : |
|
|
%%%% |
| 1791 : |
|
|
% multitable syntax |
| 1792 : |
|
|
\def\tab{&} |
| 1793 : |
|
|
|
| 1794 : |
|
|
%%%% |
| 1795 : |
|
|
% @multitable ... @endmultitable definitions: |
| 1796 : |
|
|
|
| 1797 : |
|
|
\def\multitable#1\item{\bgroup |
| 1798 : |
|
|
\let\item\cr |
| 1799 : |
|
|
\tolerance=9500 |
| 1800 : |
|
|
\hbadness=9500 |
| 1801 : |
|
|
\parskip=\intableparskip |
| 1802 : |
|
|
\parindent=\intableparindent |
| 1803 : |
|
|
\overfullrule=0pt |
| 1804 : |
|
|
\global\colcount=0\relax% |
| 1805 : |
|
|
\def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\global\everycr{}\cr\egroup\egroup}% |
| 1806 : |
|
|
% To parse everything between @multitable and @item : |
| 1807 : |
|
|
\def\one{#1}\expandafter\setuptable\one\endsetuptable |
| 1808 : |
|
|
% Need to reset this to 0 after \setuptable. |
| 1809 : |
|
|
\global\colcount=0\relax% |
| 1810 : |
|
|
% |
| 1811 : |
|
|
% This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will |
| 1812 : |
|
|
% be used as many times as user calls for columns. |
| 1813 : |
|
|
% \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and |
| 1814 : |
|
|
% continue for many paragraphs if desired. |
| 1815 : |
|
|
\halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax% |
| 1816 : |
|
|
\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname |
| 1817 : |
|
|
% In order to keep entries from bumping into each other |
| 1818 : |
|
|
% we will add a \leftskip of \spacebetweencols to all columns after |
| 1819 : |
|
|
% the first one. |
| 1820 : |
|
|
% If a template has been used, we will add \spacebetweencols |
| 1821 : |
|
|
% to the width of each template entry. |
| 1822 : |
|
|
% If user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize |
| 1823 : |
|
|
% we will use that dimension as the width of the column, and |
| 1824 : |
|
|
% the \leftskip will keep entries from bumping into each other. |
| 1825 : |
|
|
% Table will start at left margin and final column will justify at |
| 1826 : |
|
|
% right margin. |
| 1827 : |
|
|
\ifnum\colcount=1 |
| 1828 : |
|
|
\else |
| 1829 : |
|
|
\ifsetpercent |
| 1830 : |
|
|
\else |
| 1831 : |
|
|
% If user has <not> set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize |
| 1832 : |
|
|
% we will advance \hsize by \spacebetweencols |
| 1833 : |
|
|
\advance\hsize by \spacebetweencols |
| 1834 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 1835 : |
|
|
% In either case we will make \leftskip=\spacebetweencols: |
| 1836 : |
|
|
\leftskip=\spacebetweencols |
| 1837 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 1838 : |
|
|
\noindent##}\cr% |
| 1839 : |
|
|
% \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of |
| 1840 : |
|
|
% each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one. |
| 1841 : |
|
|
% The table preamble |
| 1842 : |
|
|
% looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width. |
| 1843 : |
|
|
\global\everycr{\noalign{\nointerlineskip\vskip\spacebetweenlines |
| 1844 : |
|
|
\filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. |
| 1845 : |
|
|
\global\colcount=0\relax}}} |
| 1846 : |
|
|
|
| 1847 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\message{indexing,} |
| 1848 : |
|
|
% Index generation facilities |
| 1849 : |
|
|
|
| 1850 : |
|
|
% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite |
| 1851 : |
|
|
% except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex. |
| 1852 : |
|
|
{\catcode`\@=11 |
| 1853 : |
|
|
\gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}} |
| 1854 : |
|
|
|
| 1855 : |
|
|
% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. |
| 1856 : |
|
|
% It automatically defines \fooindex such that |
| 1857 : |
|
|
% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. |
| 1858 : |
|
|
% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for |
| 1859 : |
|
|
% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. |
| 1860 : |
|
|
% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long |
| 1861 : |
|
|
% for the sake of vms. |
| 1862 : |
|
|
|
| 1863 : |
|
|
\def\newindex #1{ |
| 1864 : |
|
|
\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname% Define number for output file |
| 1865 : |
|
|
\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file |
| 1866 : |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex |
| 1867 : |
|
|
\noexpand\doindex {#1}} |
| 1868 : |
|
|
} |
| 1869 : |
|
|
|
| 1870 : |
|
|
% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} |
| 1871 : |
|
|
|
| 1872 : |
|
|
\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} |
| 1873 : |
|
|
|
| 1874 : |
|
|
% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. |
| 1875 : |
|
|
|
| 1876 : |
|
|
\def\newcodeindex #1{ |
| 1877 : |
|
|
\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname% Define number for output file |
| 1878 : |
|
|
\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file |
| 1879 : |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex |
| 1880 : |
|
|
\noexpand\docodeindex {#1}} |
| 1881 : |
|
|
} |
| 1882 : |
|
|
|
| 1883 : |
|
|
\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} |
| 1884 : |
|
|
|
| 1885 : |
|
|
% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. |
| 1886 : |
|
|
% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. |
| 1887 : |
|
|
\def\synindex #1 #2 {% |
| 1888 : |
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname |
| 1889 : |
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo |
| 1890 : |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex |
| 1891 : |
|
|
\noexpand\doindex {#2}}% |
| 1892 : |
|
|
} |
| 1893 : |
|
|
|
| 1894 : |
|
|
% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo |
| 1895 : |
|
|
% inside @code. |
| 1896 : |
|
|
\def\syncodeindex #1 #2 {% |
| 1897 : |
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname |
| 1898 : |
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo |
| 1899 : |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex |
| 1900 : |
|
|
\noexpand\docodeindex {#2}}% |
| 1901 : |
|
|
} |
| 1902 : |
|
|
|
| 1903 : |
|
|
% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. |
| 1904 : |
|
|
% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, |
| 1905 : |
|
|
% and it is "foo", the name of the index. |
| 1906 : |
|
|
|
| 1907 : |
|
|
% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. |
| 1908 : |
|
|
% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. |
| 1909 : |
|
|
|
| 1910 : |
|
|
% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} |
| 1911 : |
|
|
% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. |
| 1912 : |
|
|
|
| 1913 : |
|
|
\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} |
| 1914 : |
|
|
\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} |
| 1915 : |
|
|
|
| 1916 : |
|
|
% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. |
| 1917 : |
|
|
\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} |
| 1918 : |
|
|
\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} |
| 1919 : |
|
|
|
| 1920 : |
|
|
\def\indexdummies{% |
| 1921 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Take care of the plain tex accent commands. |
| 1922 : |
|
|
\def\"{\realbackslash "}% |
| 1923 : |
|
|
\def\`{\realbackslash `}% |
| 1924 : |
|
|
\def\'{\realbackslash '}% |
| 1925 : |
|
|
\def\^{\realbackslash ^}% |
| 1926 : |
|
|
\def\~{\realbackslash ~}% |
| 1927 : |
|
|
\def\={\realbackslash =}% |
| 1928 : |
|
|
\def\b{\realbackslash b}% |
| 1929 : |
|
|
\def\c{\realbackslash c}% |
| 1930 : |
|
|
\def\d{\realbackslash d}% |
| 1931 : |
|
|
\def\u{\realbackslash u}% |
| 1932 : |
|
|
\def\v{\realbackslash v}% |
| 1933 : |
|
|
\def\H{\realbackslash H}% |
| 1934 : |
|
|
% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters. |
| 1935 : |
|
|
\def\oe{\realbackslash oe}% |
| 1936 : |
|
|
\def\ae{\realbackslash ae}% |
| 1937 : |
|
|
\def\aa{\realbackslash aa}% |
| 1938 : |
|
|
\def\OE{\realbackslash OE}% |
| 1939 : |
|
|
\def\AE{\realbackslash AE}% |
| 1940 : |
|
|
\def\AA{\realbackslash AA}% |
| 1941 : |
|
|
\def\o{\realbackslash o}% |
| 1942 : |
|
|
\def\O{\realbackslash O}% |
| 1943 : |
|
|
\def\l{\realbackslash l}% |
| 1944 : |
|
|
\def\L{\realbackslash L}% |
| 1945 : |
|
|
\def\ss{\realbackslash ss}% |
| 1946 : |
|
|
% Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry. |
| 1947 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\_{{\realbackslash _}}% |
| 1948 : |
|
|
\def\w{\realbackslash w }% |
| 1949 : |
|
|
\def\bf{\realbackslash bf }% |
| 1950 : |
|
|
\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }% |
| 1951 : |
|
|
\def\sl{\realbackslash sl }% |
| 1952 : |
|
|
\def\sf{\realbackslash sf}% |
| 1953 : |
|
|
\def\tt{\realbackslash tt}% |
| 1954 : |
|
|
\def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}% |
| 1955 : |
|
|
\def\less{\realbackslash less}% |
| 1956 : |
|
|
\def\hat{\realbackslash hat}% |
| 1957 : |
|
|
\def\char{\realbackslash char}% |
| 1958 : |
|
|
\def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}% |
| 1959 : |
|
|
\def\dots{\realbackslash dots }% |
| 1960 : |
|
|
\def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright }% |
| 1961 : |
|
|
\def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}% |
| 1962 : |
|
|
\def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}% |
| 1963 : |
|
|
\def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}% |
| 1964 : |
|
|
\def\t##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}% |
| 1965 : |
|
|
\def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}% |
| 1966 : |
|
|
\def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}% |
| 1967 : |
|
|
\def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}% |
| 1968 : |
|
|
\def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}% |
| 1969 : |
|
|
\def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}% |
| 1970 : |
|
|
\def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}% |
| 1971 : |
|
|
\def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}% |
| 1972 : |
|
|
\def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}% |
| 1973 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}% |
| 1974 : |
|
|
\def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}% |
| 1975 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
} |
| 1976 : |
|
|
|
| 1977 : |
|
|
% \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands. |
| 1978 : |
|
|
% This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by. |
| 1979 : |
|
|
\def\indexdummyfont#1{#1} |
| 1980 : |
|
|
\def\indexdummytex{TeX} |
| 1981 : |
|
|
\def\indexdummydots{...} |
| 1982 : |
|
|
|
| 1983 : |
|
|
\def\indexnofonts{% |
| 1984 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Just ignore accents. |
| 1985 : |
|
|
\let\"=\indexdummyfont |
| 1986 : |
|
|
\let\`=\indexdummyfont |
| 1987 : |
|
|
\let\'=\indexdummyfont |
| 1988 : |
|
|
\let\^=\indexdummyfont |
| 1989 : |
|
|
\let\~=\indexdummyfont |
| 1990 : |
|
|
\let\==\indexdummyfont |
| 1991 : |
|
|
\let\b=\indexdummyfont |
| 1992 : |
|
|
\let\c=\indexdummyfont |
| 1993 : |
|
|
\let\d=\indexdummyfont |
| 1994 : |
|
|
\let\u=\indexdummyfont |
| 1995 : |
|
|
\let\v=\indexdummyfont |
| 1996 : |
|
|
\let\H=\indexdummyfont |
| 1997 : |
|
|
% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters. |
| 1998 : |
|
|
\def\oe{oe}% |
| 1999 : |
|
|
\def\ae{ae}% |
| 2000 : |
|
|
\def\aa{aa}% |
| 2001 : |
|
|
\def\OE{OE}% |
| 2002 : |
|
|
\def\AE{AE}% |
| 2003 : |
|
|
\def\AA{AA}% |
| 2004 : |
|
|
\def\o{o}% |
| 2005 : |
|
|
\def\O{O}% |
| 2006 : |
|
|
\def\l{l}% |
| 2007 : |
|
|
\def\L{L}% |
| 2008 : |
|
|
\def\ss{ss}% |
| 2009 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\let\w=\indexdummyfont |
| 2010 : |
|
|
\let\t=\indexdummyfont |
| 2011 : |
|
|
\let\r=\indexdummyfont |
| 2012 : |
|
|
\let\i=\indexdummyfont |
| 2013 : |
|
|
\let\b=\indexdummyfont |
| 2014 : |
|
|
\let\emph=\indexdummyfont |
| 2015 : |
|
|
\let\strong=\indexdummyfont |
| 2016 : |
|
|
\let\cite=\indexdummyfont |
| 2017 : |
|
|
\let\sc=\indexdummyfont |
| 2018 : |
|
|
%Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command |
| 2019 : |
|
|
% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |... |
| 2020 : |
|
|
%\let\tt=\indexdummyfont |
| 2021 : |
|
|
\let\tclose=\indexdummyfont |
| 2022 : |
|
|
\let\code=\indexdummyfont |
| 2023 : |
|
|
\let\file=\indexdummyfont |
| 2024 : |
|
|
\let\samp=\indexdummyfont |
| 2025 : |
|
|
\let\kbd=\indexdummyfont |
| 2026 : |
|
|
\let\key=\indexdummyfont |
| 2027 : |
|
|
\let\var=\indexdummyfont |
| 2028 : |
|
|
\let\TeX=\indexdummytex |
| 2029 : |
|
|
\let\dots=\indexdummydots |
| 2030 : |
|
|
} |
| 2031 : |
|
|
|
| 2032 : |
|
|
% To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape. |
| 2033 : |
|
|
% We must first make another character (@) an escape |
| 2034 : |
|
|
% so we do not become unable to do a definition. |
| 2035 : |
|
|
|
| 2036 : |
|
|
{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other |
| 2037 : |
|
|
@gdef@realbackslash{\}} |
| 2038 : |
|
|
|
| 2039 : |
|
|
\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. |
| 2040 : |
|
|
|
| 2041 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\let\SETmarginindex=\relax %initialize! |
| 2042 : |
|
|
% workhorse for all \fooindexes |
| 2043 : |
|
|
% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there |
| 2044 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\doind #1#2{% |
| 2045 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Put the index entry in the margin if desired. |
| 2046 : |
|
|
\ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else% |
| 2047 : |
|
|
\insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}% |
| 2048 : |
|
|
\fi% |
| 2049 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
{\count10=\lastpenalty % |
| 2050 : |
|
|
{\indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage |
| 2051 : |
|
|
\escapechar=`\\% |
| 2052 : |
|
|
{\let\folio=0% Expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio |
| 2053 : |
|
|
\def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now |
| 2054 : |
|
|
% so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash in the indx. |
| 2055 : |
|
|
% |
| 2056 : |
|
|
% Now process the index-string once, with all font commands turned off, |
| 2057 : |
|
|
% to get the string to sort the index by. |
| 2058 : |
|
|
{\indexnofonts |
| 2059 : |
|
|
\xdef\temp1{#2}% |
| 2060 : |
|
|
}% |
| 2061 : |
|
|
% Now produce the complete index entry. We process the index-string again, |
| 2062 : |
|
|
% this time with font commands expanded, to get what to print in the index. |
| 2063 : |
|
|
\edef\temp{% |
| 2064 : |
|
|
\write \csname#1indfile\endcsname{% |
| 2065 : |
|
|
\realbackslash entry {\temp1}{\folio}{#2}}}% |
| 2066 : |
|
|
\temp }% |
| 2067 : |
|
|
}\penalty\count10}} |
| 2068 : |
|
|
|
| 2069 : |
|
|
\def\dosubind #1#2#3{% |
| 2070 : |
|
|
{\count10=\lastpenalty % |
| 2071 : |
|
|
{\indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage |
| 2072 : |
|
|
\escapechar=`\\% |
| 2073 : |
|
|
{\let\folio=0% |
| 2074 : |
|
|
\def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% |
| 2075 : |
|
|
% |
| 2076 : |
|
|
% Now process the index-string once, with all font commands turned off, |
| 2077 : |
|
|
% to get the string to sort the index by. |
| 2078 : |
|
|
{\indexnofonts |
| 2079 : |
|
|
\xdef\temp1{#2 #3}% |
| 2080 : |
|
|
}% |
| 2081 : |
|
|
% Now produce the complete index entry. We process the index-string again, |
| 2082 : |
|
|
% this time with font commands expanded, to get what to print in the index. |
| 2083 : |
|
|
\edef\temp{% |
| 2084 : |
|
|
\write \csname#1indfile\endcsname{% |
| 2085 : |
|
|
\realbackslash entry {\temp1}{\folio}{#2}{#3}}}% |
| 2086 : |
|
|
\temp }% |
| 2087 : |
|
|
}\penalty\count10}} |
| 2088 : |
|
|
|
| 2089 : |
|
|
% The index entry written in the file actually looks like |
| 2090 : |
|
|
% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} |
| 2091 : |
|
|
% or |
| 2092 : |
|
|
% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} |
| 2093 : |
|
|
% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files |
| 2094 : |
|
|
% containing these kinds of lines: |
| 2095 : |
|
|
% \initial {c} |
| 2096 : |
|
|
% before the first topic whose initial is c |
| 2097 : |
|
|
% \entry {topic}{pagelist} |
| 2098 : |
|
|
% for a topic that is used without subtopics |
| 2099 : |
|
|
% \primary {topic} |
| 2100 : |
|
|
% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics |
| 2101 : |
|
|
% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} |
| 2102 : |
|
|
% for each subtopic. |
| 2103 : |
|
|
|
| 2104 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Define the user-accessible indexing commands |
| 2105 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. |
| 2106 : |
|
|
|
| 2107 : |
|
|
\def\findex {\fnindex} |
| 2108 : |
|
|
\def\kindex {\kyindex} |
| 2109 : |
|
|
\def\cindex {\cpindex} |
| 2110 : |
|
|
\def\vindex {\vrindex} |
| 2111 : |
|
|
\def\tindex {\tpindex} |
| 2112 : |
|
|
\def\pindex {\pgindex} |
| 2113 : |
|
|
|
| 2114 : |
|
|
\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} |
| 2115 : |
|
|
{\obeylines % |
| 2116 : |
|
|
\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % |
| 2117 : |
|
|
\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} |
| 2118 : |
|
|
|
| 2119 : |
|
|
% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. |
| 2120 : |
|
|
|
| 2121 : |
|
|
% This is what you call to cause a particular index to get printed. |
| 2122 : |
|
|
% Write |
| 2123 : |
|
|
% @unnumbered Function Index |
| 2124 : |
|
|
% @printindex fn |
| 2125 : |
|
|
|
| 2126 : |
|
|
\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex} |
| 2127 : |
|
|
|
| 2128 : |
|
|
\def\doprintindex#1{% |
| 2129 : |
|
|
\tex |
| 2130 : |
|
|
\dobreak \chapheadingskip {10000} |
| 2131 : |
|
|
\catcode`\%=\other\catcode`\&=\other\catcode`\#=\other |
| 2132 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\catcode`\$=\other |
| 2133 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\catcode`\~=\other |
| 2134 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\indexbreaks |
| 2135 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% |
| 2136 : |
|
|
% The following don't help, since the chars were translated |
| 2137 : |
|
|
% when the raw index was written, and their fonts were discarded |
| 2138 : |
|
|
% due to \indexnofonts. |
| 2139 : |
|
|
%\catcode`\"=\active |
| 2140 : |
|
|
%\catcode`\^=\active |
| 2141 : |
|
|
%\catcode`\_=\active |
| 2142 : |
|
|
%\catcode`\|=\active |
| 2143 : |
|
|
%\catcode`\<=\active |
| 2144 : |
|
|
%\catcode`\>=\active |
| 2145 : |
|
|
% % |
| 2146 : |
|
|
\def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx} |
| 2147 : |
|
|
\indexfonts\rm \tolerance=9500 \advance\baselineskip -1pt |
| 2148 : |
|
|
\begindoublecolumns |
| 2149 : |
|
|
% |
| 2150 : |
|
|
% See if the index file exists and is nonempty. |
| 2151 : |
|
|
\openin 1 \jobname.#1s |
| 2152 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\ifeof 1 |
| 2153 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, |
| 2154 : |
|
|
% and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the |
| 2155 : |
|
|
% index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure |
| 2156 : |
|
|
% there is some text. |
| 2157 : |
|
|
(Index is nonexistent) |
| 2158 : |
|
|
\else |
| 2159 : |
|
|
% |
| 2160 : |
|
|
% If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof |
| 2161 : |
|
|
% false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so |
| 2162 : |
|
|
% it can discover if there is anything in it. |
| 2163 : |
|
|
\read 1 to \temp |
| 2164 : |
|
|
\ifeof 1 |
| 2165 : |
|
|
(Index is empty) |
| 2166 : |
|
|
\else |
| 2167 : |
|
|
\input \jobname.#1s |
| 2168 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 2169 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 2170 : |
|
|
\closein 1 |
| 2171 : |
|
|
\enddoublecolumns |
| 2172 : |
|
|
\Etex |
| 2173 : |
|
|
} |
| 2174 : |
|
|
|
| 2175 : |
|
|
% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. |
| 2176 : |
|
|
% Change them to control the appearance of the index. |
| 2177 : |
|
|
|
| 2178 : |
|
|
% Same as \bigskipamount except no shrink. |
| 2179 : |
|
|
% \balancecolumns gets confused if there is any shrink. |
| 2180 : |
|
|
\newskip\initialskipamount \initialskipamount 12pt plus4pt |
| 2181 : |
|
|
|
| 2182 : |
|
|
\def\initial #1{% |
| 2183 : |
|
|
{\let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt |
| 2184 : |
|
|
\ifdim\lastskip<\initialskipamount |
| 2185 : |
|
|
\removelastskip \penalty-200 \vskip \initialskipamount\fi |
| 2186 : |
|
|
\line{\secbf#1\hfill}\kern 2pt\penalty10000}} |
| 2187 : |
|
|
|
| 2188 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2 |
| 2189 : |
|
|
% flush to the right margin. It is used for index and table of contents |
| 2190 : |
|
|
% entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. |
| 2191 : |
|
|
% |
| 2192 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\entry #1#2{\begingroup |
| 2193 : |
|
|
% |
| 2194 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't |
| 2195 : |
|
|
% affect previous text. |
| 2196 : |
|
|
\par |
| 2197 : |
|
|
% |
| 2198 : |
|
|
% Do not fill out the last line with white space. |
| 2199 : |
|
|
\parfillskip = 0in |
| 2200 : |
|
|
% |
| 2201 : |
|
|
% No extra space above this paragraph. |
| 2202 : |
|
|
\parskip = 0in |
| 2203 : |
|
|
% |
| 2204 : |
|
|
% Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. |
| 2205 : |
|
|
\finalhyphendemerits = 0 |
| 2206 : |
|
|
% |
| 2207 : |
|
|
% \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number |
| 2208 : |
|
|
% don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the |
| 2209 : |
|
|
% dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large |
| 2210 : |
|
|
% indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across |
| 2211 : |
|
|
% lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. |
| 2212 : |
|
|
% |
| 2213 : |
|
|
% \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start |
| 2214 : |
|
|
% of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. |
| 2215 : |
|
|
\hangindent=2em |
| 2216 : |
|
|
% |
| 2217 : |
|
|
% When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line |
| 2218 : |
|
|
% with blank space. |
| 2219 : |
|
|
\rightskip = 0pt plus1fil |
| 2220 : |
|
|
% |
| 2221 : |
|
|
% Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking |
| 2222 : |
|
|
% parameters we've set above will have an effect. |
| 2223 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\noindent |
| 2224 : |
|
|
% |
| 2225 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Insert the text of the index entry. TeX will do line-breaking on it. |
| 2226 : |
|
|
#1% |
| 2227 : |
|
|
% The following is kluged to not output a line of dots in the index if |
| 2228 : |
|
|
% there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be |
| 2229 : |
|
|
% cursed by a Unix daemon. |
| 2230 : |
|
|
\def\tempa{{\rm }}% |
| 2231 : |
|
|
\def\tempb{#2}% |
| 2232 : |
|
|
\edef\tempc{\tempa}% |
| 2233 : |
|
|
\edef\tempd{\tempb}% |
| 2234 : |
|
|
\ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else% |
| 2235 : |
|
|
% |
| 2236 : |
|
|
% If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out |
| 2237 : |
|
|
% this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the |
| 2238 : |
|
|
% fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) |
| 2239 : |
|
|
\hfil\penalty50 |
| 2240 : |
|
|
\null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. |
| 2241 : |
|
|
% |
| 2242 : |
|
|
% The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as |
| 2243 : |
|
|
% part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull |
| 2244 : |
|
|
% \hbox ensues. |
| 2245 : |
|
|
\ #2% The page number ends the paragraph. |
| 2246 : |
|
|
\fi% |
| 2247 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\par |
| 2248 : |
|
|
\endgroup} |
| 2249 : |
|
|
|
| 2250 : |
|
|
% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em. |
| 2251 : |
|
|
\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders |
| 2252 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} |
| 2253 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 2254 : |
|
|
\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} |
| 2255 : |
|
|
|
| 2256 : |
|
|
\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm |
| 2257 : |
|
|
|
| 2258 : |
|
|
\def\secondary #1#2{ |
| 2259 : |
|
|
{\parfillskip=0in \parskip=0in |
| 2260 : |
|
|
\hangindent =1in \hangafter=1 |
| 2261 : |
|
|
\noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill #2\par |
| 2262 : |
|
|
}} |
| 2263 : |
|
|
|
| 2264 : |
|
|
%% Define two-column mode, which is used in indexes. |
| 2265 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
%% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416. |
| 2266 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\catcode `\@=11 |
| 2267 : |
|
|
|
| 2268 : |
|
|
\newbox\partialpage |
| 2269 : |
|
|
|
| 2270 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize |
| 2271 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 2272 : |
|
|
\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup |
| 2273 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Grab any single-column material above us. |
| 2274 : |
|
|
\output = {\global\setbox\partialpage |
| 2275 : |
|
|
=\vbox{\unvbox255\kern -\topskip \kern \baselineskip}}% |
| 2276 : |
|
|
\eject |
| 2277 : |
|
|
% |
| 2278 : |
|
|
% Now switch to the double-column output routine. |
| 2279 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\output={\doublecolumnout}% |
| 2280 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 2281 : |
|
|
% Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this |
| 2282 : |
|
|
% routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 |
| 2283 : |
|
|
% format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple |
| 2284 : |
|
|
% of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the |
| 2285 : |
|
|
% execution time, so we may as well do it once. |
| 2286 : |
|
|
% |
| 2287 : |
|
|
% First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between |
| 2288 : |
|
|
% the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it |
| 2289 : |
|
|
% changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant |
| 2290 : |
|
|
% below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +- < |
| 2291 : |
|
|
% 1pt) as it did when we hard-coded it. |
| 2292 : |
|
|
% |
| 2293 : |
|
|
% We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we |
| 2294 : |
|
|
% can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) |
| 2295 : |
|
|
% been clobbered. |
| 2296 : |
|
|
% |
| 2297 : |
|
|
\doublecolumnhsize = \hsize |
| 2298 : |
|
|
\advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize |
| 2299 : |
|
|
\divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 |
| 2300 : |
|
|
\hsize = \doublecolumnhsize |
| 2301 : |
|
|
% |
| 2302 : |
|
|
% Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, |
| 2303 : |
|
|
% since nobody clobbers \vsize.) |
| 2304 : |
|
|
\vsize = 2\vsize |
| 2305 : |
|
|
\doublecolumnpagegoal |
| 2306 : |
|
|
} |
| 2307 : |
|
|
|
| 2308 : |
|
|
\def\enddoublecolumns{\eject \endgroup \pagegoal=\vsize \unvbox\partialpage} |
| 2309 : |
|
|
|
| 2310 : |
|
|
\def\doublecolumnsplit{\splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth |
| 2311 : |
|
|
\global\dimen@=\pageheight \global\advance\dimen@ by-\ht\partialpage |
| 2312 : |
|
|
\global\setbox1=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \global\setbox0=\vbox{\unvbox1} |
| 2313 : |
|
|
\global\setbox3=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \global\setbox2=\vbox{\unvbox3} |
| 2314 : |
|
|
\ifdim\ht0>\dimen@ \setbox255=\vbox{\unvbox0\unvbox2} \global\setbox255=\copy5 \fi |
| 2315 : |
|
|
\ifdim\ht2>\dimen@ \setbox255=\vbox{\unvbox0\unvbox2} \global\setbox255=\copy5 \fi |
| 2316 : |
|
|
} |
| 2317 : |
|
|
\def\doublecolumnpagegoal{% |
| 2318 : |
|
|
\dimen@=\vsize \advance\dimen@ by-2\ht\partialpage \global\pagegoal=\dimen@ |
| 2319 : |
|
|
} |
| 2320 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\pagesofar{\unvbox\partialpage % |
| 2321 : |
|
|
\hsize=\doublecolumnhsize % have to restore this since output routine |
| 2322 : |
|
|
\wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}} |
| 2323 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\doublecolumnout{% |
| 2324 : |
|
|
\setbox5=\copy255 |
| 2325 : |
|
|
{\vbadness=10000 \doublecolumnsplit} |
| 2326 : |
|
|
\ifvbox255 |
| 2327 : |
|
|
\setbox0=\vtop to\dimen@{\unvbox0} |
| 2328 : |
|
|
\setbox2=\vtop to\dimen@{\unvbox2} |
| 2329 : |
|
|
\onepageout\pagesofar \unvbox255 \penalty\outputpenalty |
| 2330 : |
|
|
\else |
| 2331 : |
|
|
\setbox0=\vbox{\unvbox5} |
| 2332 : |
|
|
\ifvbox0 |
| 2333 : |
|
|
\dimen@=\ht0 \advance\dimen@ by\topskip \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip |
| 2334 : |
|
|
\divide\dimen@ by2 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth |
| 2335 : |
|
|
{\vbadness=10000 |
| 2336 : |
|
|
\loop \global\setbox5=\copy0 |
| 2337 : |
|
|
\setbox1=\vsplit5 to\dimen@ |
| 2338 : |
|
|
\setbox3=\vsplit5 to\dimen@ |
| 2339 : |
|
|
\ifvbox5 \global\advance\dimen@ by1pt \repeat |
| 2340 : |
|
|
\setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1} |
| 2341 : |
|
|
\setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3} |
| 2342 : |
|
|
\global\setbox\partialpage=\vbox{\pagesofar} |
| 2343 : |
|
|
\doublecolumnpagegoal |
| 2344 : |
|
|
} |
| 2345 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 2346 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\fi |
| 2347 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
} |
| 2348 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 2349 : |
|
|
\catcode `\@=\other |
| 2350 : |
|
|
\message{sectioning,} |
| 2351 : |
|
|
% Define chapters, sections, etc. |
| 2352 : |
|
|
|
| 2353 : |
|
|
\newcount \chapno |
| 2354 : |
|
|
\newcount \secno \secno=0 |
| 2355 : |
|
|
\newcount \subsecno \subsecno=0 |
| 2356 : |
|
|
\newcount \subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 |
| 2357 : |
|
|
|
| 2358 : |
|
|
% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... |
| 2359 : |
|
|
\newcount \appendixno \appendixno = `\@ |
| 2360 : |
|
|
\def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} |
| 2361 : |
|
|
|
| 2362 : |
|
|
\newwrite \contentsfile |
| 2363 : |
|
|
% This is called from \setfilename. |
| 2364 : |
|
|
\def\opencontents{\openout \contentsfile = \jobname.toc} |
| 2365 : |
|
|
|
| 2366 : |
|
|
% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter. |
| 2367 : |
|
|
% page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise |
| 2368 : |
|
|
|
| 2369 : |
|
|
\def\thischapter{} \def\thissection{} |
| 2370 : |
|
|
\def\seccheck#1{\if \pageno<0 % |
| 2371 : |
|
|
\errmessage{@#1 not allowed after generating table of contents}\fi |
| 2372 : |
|
|
% |
| 2373 : |
|
|
} |
| 2374 : |
|
|
|
| 2375 : |
|
|
\def\chapternofonts{% |
| 2376 : |
|
|
\let\rawbackslash=\relax% |
| 2377 : |
|
|
\let\frenchspacing=\relax% |
| 2378 : |
|
|
\def\result{\realbackslash result} |
| 2379 : |
|
|
\def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv} |
| 2380 : |
|
|
\def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion} |
| 2381 : |
|
|
\def\print{\realbackslash print} |
| 2382 : |
|
|
\def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX} |
| 2383 : |
|
|
\def\dots{\realbackslash dots} |
| 2384 : |
|
|
\def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright} |
| 2385 : |
|
|
\def\tt{\realbackslash tt} |
| 2386 : |
|
|
\def\bf{\realbackslash bf } |
| 2387 : |
|
|
\def\w{\realbackslash w} |
| 2388 : |
|
|
\def\less{\realbackslash less} |
| 2389 : |
|
|
\def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr} |
| 2390 : |
|
|
\def\hat{\realbackslash hat} |
| 2391 : |
|
|
\def\char{\realbackslash char} |
| 2392 : |
|
|
\def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}} |
| 2393 : |
|
|
\def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}} |
| 2394 : |
|
|
\def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}} |
| 2395 : |
|
|
\def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}} |
| 2396 : |
|
|
\def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}} |
| 2397 : |
|
|
\def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}} |
| 2398 : |
|
|
\def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}} |
| 2399 : |
|
|
\def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}} |
| 2400 : |
|
|
% These are redefined because @smartitalic wouldn't work inside xdef. |
| 2401 : |
|
|
\def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}} |
| 2402 : |
|
|
\def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}} |
| 2403 : |
|
|
\def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}} |
| 2404 : |
|
|
\def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}} |
| 2405 : |
|
|
\def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}} |
| 2406 : |
|
|
} |
| 2407 : |
|
|
|
| 2408 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level |
| 2409 : |
|
|
\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count |
| 2410 : |
|
|
|
| 2411 : |
|
|
% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. |
| 2412 : |
|
|
\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} |
| 2413 : |
|
|
\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name |
| 2414 : |
|
|
|
| 2415 : |
|
|
% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. |
| 2416 : |
|
|
\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} |
| 2417 : |
|
|
\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name |
| 2418 : |
|
|
|
| 2419 : |
|
|
% Choose a numbered-heading macro |
| 2420 : |
|
|
% #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections |
| 2421 : |
|
|
% #2 is text for heading |
| 2422 : |
|
|
\def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 |
| 2423 : |
|
|
\ifcase\absseclevel |
| 2424 : |
|
|
\chapterzzz{#2} |
| 2425 : |
|
|
\or |
| 2426 : |
|
|
\seczzz{#2} |
| 2427 : |
|
|
\or |
| 2428 : |
|
|
\numberedsubseczzz{#2} |
| 2429 : |
|
|
\or |
| 2430 : |
|
|
\numberedsubsubseczzz{#2} |
| 2431 : |
|
|
\else |
| 2432 : |
|
|
\ifnum \absseclevel<0 |
| 2433 : |
|
|
\chapterzzz{#2} |
| 2434 : |
|
|
\else |
| 2435 : |
|
|
\numberedsubsubseczzz{#2} |
| 2436 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 2437 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 2438 : |
|
|
} |
| 2439 : |
|
|
|
| 2440 : |
|
|
% like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels |
| 2441 : |
|
|
\def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 |
| 2442 : |
|
|
\ifcase\absseclevel |
| 2443 : |
|
|
\appendixzzz{#2} |
| 2444 : |
|
|
\or |
| 2445 : |
|
|
\appendixsectionzzz{#2} |
| 2446 : |
|
|
\or |
| 2447 : |
|
|
\appendixsubseczzz{#2} |
| 2448 : |
|
|
\or |
| 2449 : |
|
|
\appendixsubsubseczzz{#2} |
| 2450 : |
|
|
\else |
| 2451 : |
|
|
\ifnum \absseclevel<0 |
| 2452 : |
|
|
\appendixzzz{#2} |
| 2453 : |
|
|
\else |
| 2454 : |
|
|
\appendixsubsubseczzz{#2} |
| 2455 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 2456 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 2457 : |
|
|
} |
| 2458 : |
|
|
|
| 2459 : |
|
|
% like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels |
| 2460 : |
|
|
\def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 |
| 2461 : |
|
|
\ifcase\absseclevel |
| 2462 : |
|
|
\unnumberedzzz{#2} |
| 2463 : |
|
|
\or |
| 2464 : |
|
|
\unnumberedseczzz{#2} |
| 2465 : |
|
|
\or |
| 2466 : |
|
|
\unnumberedsubseczzz{#2} |
| 2467 : |
|
|
\or |
| 2468 : |
|
|
\unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2} |
| 2469 : |
|
|
\else |
| 2470 : |
|
|
\ifnum \absseclevel<0 |
| 2471 : |
|
|
\unnumberedzzz{#2} |
| 2472 : |
|
|
\else |
| 2473 : |
|
|
\unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2} |
| 2474 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 2475 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 2476 : |
|
|
} |
| 2477 : |
|
|
|
| 2478 : |
|
|
|
| 2479 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title} |
| 2480 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy} |
| 2481 : |
|
|
\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz |
| 2482 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\chapterzzz #1{\seccheck{chapter}% |
| 2483 : |
|
|
\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 |
| 2484 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter \the\chapno}% |
| 2485 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}% |
| 2486 : |
|
|
\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
| 2487 : |
|
|
\gdef\thischaptername{#1}% |
| 2488 : |
|
|
% We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter |
| 2489 : |
|
|
% because we don't want its macros evaluated now. |
| 2490 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}% |
| 2491 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
{\chapternofonts% |
| 2492 : |
|
|
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash chapentry {#1}{\the\chapno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
| 2493 : |
|
|
\escapechar=`\\% |
| 2494 : |
|
|
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
| 2495 : |
|
|
\donoderef % |
| 2496 : |
|
|
\global\let\section = \numberedsec |
| 2497 : |
|
|
\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec |
| 2498 : |
|
|
\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec |
| 2499 : |
|
|
}} |
| 2500 : |
|
|
|
| 2501 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy} |
| 2502 : |
|
|
\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz |
| 2503 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\appendixzzz #1{\seccheck{appendix}% |
| 2504 : |
|
|
\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 |
| 2505 : |
|
|
\global\advance \appendixno by 1 \message{Appendix \appendixletter}% |
| 2506 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}% |
| 2507 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
| 2508 : |
|
|
\gdef\thischaptername{#1}% |
| 2509 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}% |
| 2510 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
{\chapternofonts% |
| 2511 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash chapentry |
| 2512 : |
|
|
{#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
| 2513 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\escapechar=`\\% |
| 2514 : |
|
|
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
| 2515 : |
|
|
\appendixnoderef % |
| 2516 : |
|
|
\global\let\section = \appendixsec |
| 2517 : |
|
|
\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec |
| 2518 : |
|
|
\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec |
| 2519 : |
|
|
}} |
| 2520 : |
|
|
|
| 2521 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy} |
| 2522 : |
|
|
\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy} |
| 2523 : |
|
|
\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz |
| 2524 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\unnumberedzzz #1{\seccheck{unnumbered}% |
| 2525 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 |
| 2526 : |
|
|
% |
| 2527 : |
|
|
% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the |
| 2528 : |
|
|
% argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX |
| 2529 : |
|
|
% expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX |
| 2530 : |
|
|
% expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant |
| 2531 : |
|
|
% to be executed, not expanded). |
| 2532 : |
|
|
% |
| 2533 : |
|
|
% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear |
| 2534 : |
|
|
% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use |
| 2535 : |
|
|
% \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, |
| 2536 : |
|
|
% simply yielding the contents of the <toks register>. |
| 2537 : |
|
|
\toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}% |
| 2538 : |
|
|
% |
| 2539 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\unnumbchapmacro {#1}% |
| 2540 : |
|
|
\gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
| 2541 : |
|
|
{\chapternofonts% |
| 2542 : |
|
|
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry {#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
| 2543 : |
|
|
\escapechar=`\\% |
| 2544 : |
|
|
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
| 2545 : |
|
|
\unnumbnoderef % |
| 2546 : |
|
|
\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec |
| 2547 : |
|
|
\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec |
| 2548 : |
|
|
\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec |
| 2549 : |
|
|
}} |
| 2550 : |
|
|
|
| 2551 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy} |
| 2552 : |
|
|
\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz |
| 2553 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\seczzz #1{\seccheck{section}% |
| 2554 : |
|
|
\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 % |
| 2555 : |
|
|
\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}% |
| 2556 : |
|
|
{\chapternofonts% |
| 2557 : |
|
|
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash secentry % |
| 2558 : |
|
|
{#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
| 2559 : |
|
|
\escapechar=`\\% |
| 2560 : |
|
|
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
| 2561 : |
|
|
\donoderef % |
| 2562 : |
|
|
\penalty 10000 % |
| 2563 : |
|
|
}} |
| 2564 : |
|
|
|
| 2565 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\outer\def\appenixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy} |
| 2566 : |
|
|
\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy} |
| 2567 : |
|
|
\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz |
| 2568 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsection}% |
| 2569 : |
|
|
\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 % |
| 2570 : |
|
|
\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}% |
| 2571 : |
|
|
{\chapternofonts% |
| 2572 : |
|
|
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash secentry % |
| 2573 : |
|
|
{#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
| 2574 : |
|
|
\escapechar=`\\% |
| 2575 : |
|
|
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
| 2576 : |
|
|
\appendixnoderef % |
| 2577 : |
|
|
\penalty 10000 % |
| 2578 : |
|
|
}} |
| 2579 : |
|
|
|
| 2580 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy} |
| 2581 : |
|
|
\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz |
| 2582 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsec}% |
| 2583 : |
|
|
\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
| 2584 : |
|
|
{\chapternofonts% |
| 2585 : |
|
|
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
| 2586 : |
|
|
\escapechar=`\\% |
| 2587 : |
|
|
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
| 2588 : |
|
|
\unnumbnoderef % |
| 2589 : |
|
|
\penalty 10000 % |
| 2590 : |
|
|
}} |
| 2591 : |
|
|
|
| 2592 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy} |
| 2593 : |
|
|
\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz |
| 2594 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{subsection}% |
| 2595 : |
|
|
\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 % |
| 2596 : |
|
|
\subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}% |
| 2597 : |
|
|
{\chapternofonts% |
| 2598 : |
|
|
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsecentry % |
| 2599 : |
|
|
{#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
| 2600 : |
|
|
\escapechar=`\\% |
| 2601 : |
|
|
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
| 2602 : |
|
|
\donoderef % |
| 2603 : |
|
|
\penalty 10000 % |
| 2604 : |
|
|
}} |
| 2605 : |
|
|
|
| 2606 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy} |
| 2607 : |
|
|
\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz |
| 2608 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsubsec}% |
| 2609 : |
|
|
\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 % |
| 2610 : |
|
|
\subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}% |
| 2611 : |
|
|
{\chapternofonts% |
| 2612 : |
|
|
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsecentry % |
| 2613 : |
|
|
{#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
| 2614 : |
|
|
\escapechar=`\\% |
| 2615 : |
|
|
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
| 2616 : |
|
|
\appendixnoderef % |
| 2617 : |
|
|
\penalty 10000 % |
| 2618 : |
|
|
}} |
| 2619 : |
|
|
|
| 2620 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy} |
| 2621 : |
|
|
\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz |
| 2622 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsubsec}% |
| 2623 : |
|
|
\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
| 2624 : |
|
|
{\chapternofonts% |
| 2625 : |
|
|
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry{#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
| 2626 : |
|
|
\escapechar=`\\% |
| 2627 : |
|
|
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
| 2628 : |
|
|
\unnumbnoderef % |
| 2629 : |
|
|
\penalty 10000 % |
| 2630 : |
|
|
}} |
| 2631 : |
|
|
|
| 2632 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy} |
| 2633 : |
|
|
\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz |
| 2634 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{subsubsection}% |
| 2635 : |
|
|
\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 % |
| 2636 : |
|
|
\subsubsecheading {#1} |
| 2637 : |
|
|
{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}% |
| 2638 : |
|
|
{\chapternofonts% |
| 2639 : |
|
|
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsubsecentry % |
| 2640 : |
|
|
{#1} |
| 2641 : |
|
|
{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno} |
| 2642 : |
|
|
{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
| 2643 : |
|
|
\escapechar=`\\% |
| 2644 : |
|
|
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
| 2645 : |
|
|
\donoderef % |
| 2646 : |
|
|
\penalty 10000 % |
| 2647 : |
|
|
}} |
| 2648 : |
|
|
|
| 2649 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy} |
| 2650 : |
|
|
\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz |
| 2651 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsubsubsec}% |
| 2652 : |
|
|
\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 % |
| 2653 : |
|
|
\subsubsecheading {#1} |
| 2654 : |
|
|
{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}% |
| 2655 : |
|
|
{\chapternofonts% |
| 2656 : |
|
|
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{#1}% |
| 2657 : |
|
|
{\appendixletter} |
| 2658 : |
|
|
{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
| 2659 : |
|
|
\escapechar=`\\% |
| 2660 : |
|
|
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
| 2661 : |
|
|
\appendixnoderef % |
| 2662 : |
|
|
\penalty 10000 % |
| 2663 : |
|
|
}} |
| 2664 : |
|
|
|
| 2665 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy} |
| 2666 : |
|
|
\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz |
| 2667 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsubsubsec}% |
| 2668 : |
|
|
\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
| 2669 : |
|
|
{\chapternofonts% |
| 2670 : |
|
|
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry{#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
| 2671 : |
|
|
\escapechar=`\\% |
| 2672 : |
|
|
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
| 2673 : |
|
|
\unnumbnoderef % |
| 2674 : |
|
|
\penalty 10000 % |
| 2675 : |
|
|
}} |
| 2676 : |
|
|
|
| 2677 : |
|
|
% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo. |
| 2678 : |
|
|
% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work. |
| 2679 : |
|
|
\def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz} |
| 2680 : |
|
|
\def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz} |
| 2681 : |
|
|
\def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz} |
| 2682 : |
|
|
\def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz} |
| 2683 : |
|
|
\def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz} |
| 2684 : |
|
|
|
| 2685 : |
|
|
\def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz} |
| 2686 : |
|
|
\def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz} |
| 2687 : |
|
|
\def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz} |
| 2688 : |
|
|
\def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz} |
| 2689 : |
|
|
|
| 2690 : |
|
|
\def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz} |
| 2691 : |
|
|
\def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz} |
| 2692 : |
|
|
\def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz} |
| 2693 : |
|
|
\def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz} |
| 2694 : |
|
|
|
| 2695 : |
|
|
% These macros control what the section commands do, according |
| 2696 : |
|
|
% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). |
| 2697 : |
|
|
% Define them by default for a numbered chapter. |
| 2698 : |
|
|
\global\let\section = \numberedsec |
| 2699 : |
|
|
\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec |
| 2700 : |
|
|
\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec |
| 2701 : |
|
|
|
| 2702 : |
|
|
% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading |
| 2703 : |
|
|
|
| 2704 : |
|
|
% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and |
| 2705 : |
|
|
% such: |
| 2706 : |
|
|
% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit |
| 2707 : |
|
|
% overlong headings to fold. |
| 2708 : |
|
|
% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a |
| 2709 : |
|
|
% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. |
| 2710 : |
|
|
% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and |
| 2711 : |
|
|
% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. |
| 2712 : |
|
|
|
| 2713 : |
|
|
|
| 2714 : |
|
|
\def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz} |
| 2715 : |
|
|
\def\majorheadingzzz #1{% |
| 2716 : |
|
|
{\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% |
| 2717 : |
|
|
{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
| 2718 : |
|
|
\parindent=0pt\raggedright |
| 2719 : |
|
|
\rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200} |
| 2720 : |
|
|
|
| 2721 : |
|
|
\def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz} |
| 2722 : |
|
|
\def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak % |
| 2723 : |
|
|
{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
| 2724 : |
|
|
\parindent=0pt\raggedright |
| 2725 : |
|
|
\rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200} |
| 2726 : |
|
|
|
| 2727 : |
|
|
\def\heading{\parsearg\secheadingi} |
| 2728 : |
|
|
|
| 2729 : |
|
|
\def\subheading{\parsearg\subsecheadingi} |
| 2730 : |
|
|
|
| 2731 : |
|
|
\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\subsubsecheadingi} |
| 2732 : |
|
|
|
| 2733 : |
|
|
% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only |
| 2734 : |
|
|
% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), |
| 2735 : |
|
|
% given all the information in convenient, parsed form. |
| 2736 : |
|
|
|
| 2737 : |
|
|
%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) |
| 2738 : |
|
|
\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} |
| 2739 : |
|
|
|
| 2740 : |
|
|
\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} |
| 2741 : |
|
|
|
| 2742 : |
|
|
%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it |
| 2743 : |
|
|
% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) |
| 2744 : |
|
|
|
| 2745 : |
|
|
\newskip \chapheadingskip \chapheadingskip = 30pt plus 8pt minus 4pt |
| 2746 : |
|
|
|
| 2747 : |
|
|
\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} |
| 2748 : |
|
|
\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} |
| 2749 : |
|
|
\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi} |
| 2750 : |
|
|
|
| 2751 : |
|
|
\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} |
| 2752 : |
|
|
|
| 2753 : |
|
|
\def\CHAPPAGoff{ |
| 2754 : |
|
|
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak |
| 2755 : |
|
|
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} |
| 2756 : |
|
|
|
| 2757 : |
|
|
\def\CHAPPAGon{ |
| 2758 : |
|
|
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager |
| 2759 : |
|
|
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager |
| 2760 : |
|
|
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} |
| 2761 : |
|
|
|
| 2762 : |
|
|
\def\CHAPPAGodd{ |
| 2763 : |
|
|
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage |
| 2764 : |
|
|
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage |
| 2765 : |
|
|
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} |
| 2766 : |
|
|
|
| 2767 : |
|
|
\CHAPPAGon |
| 2768 : |
|
|
|
| 2769 : |
|
|
\def\CHAPFplain{ |
| 2770 : |
|
|
\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain |
| 2771 : |
|
|
\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain} |
| 2772 : |
|
|
|
| 2773 : |
|
|
\def\chfplain #1#2{% |
| 2774 : |
|
|
\pchapsepmacro |
| 2775 : |
|
|
{% |
| 2776 : |
|
|
\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
| 2777 : |
|
|
\parindent=0pt\raggedright |
| 2778 : |
|
|
\rm #2\enspace #1}% |
| 2779 : |
|
|
}% |
| 2780 : |
|
|
\bigskip |
| 2781 : |
|
|
\penalty5000 |
| 2782 : |
|
|
} |
| 2783 : |
|
|
|
| 2784 : |
|
|
\def\unnchfplain #1{% |
| 2785 : |
|
|
\pchapsepmacro % |
| 2786 : |
|
|
{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
| 2787 : |
|
|
\parindent=0pt\raggedright |
| 2788 : |
|
|
\rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 10000 % |
| 2789 : |
|
|
} |
| 2790 : |
|
|
\CHAPFplain % The default |
| 2791 : |
|
|
|
| 2792 : |
|
|
\def\unnchfopen #1{% |
| 2793 : |
|
|
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
| 2794 : |
|
|
\parindent=0pt\raggedright |
| 2795 : |
|
|
\rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 10000 % |
| 2796 : |
|
|
} |
| 2797 : |
|
|
|
| 2798 : |
|
|
\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts |
| 2799 : |
|
|
\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% |
| 2800 : |
|
|
\par\penalty 5000 % |
| 2801 : |
|
|
} |
| 2802 : |
|
|
|
| 2803 : |
|
|
\def\CHAPFopen{ |
| 2804 : |
|
|
\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen |
| 2805 : |
|
|
\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen} |
| 2806 : |
|
|
|
| 2807 : |
|
|
% Parameter controlling skip before section headings. |
| 2808 : |
|
|
|
| 2809 : |
|
|
\newskip \subsecheadingskip \subsecheadingskip = 17pt plus 8pt minus 4pt |
| 2810 : |
|
|
\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}} |
| 2811 : |
|
|
|
| 2812 : |
|
|
\newskip \secheadingskip \secheadingskip = 21pt plus 8pt minus 4pt |
| 2813 : |
|
|
\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}} |
| 2814 : |
|
|
|
| 2815 : |
|
|
% @paragraphindent is defined for the Info formatting commands only. |
| 2816 : |
|
|
\let\paragraphindent=\comment |
| 2817 : |
|
|
|
| 2818 : |
|
|
% Section fonts are the base font at magstep2, which produces |
| 2819 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% a size a bit more than 14 points in the default situation. |
| 2820 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 2821 : |
|
|
\def\secheading #1#2#3{\secheadingi {#2.#3\enspace #1}} |
| 2822 : |
|
|
\def\plainsecheading #1{\secheadingi {#1}} |
| 2823 : |
|
|
\def\secheadingi #1{{\advance \secheadingskip by \parskip % |
| 2824 : |
|
|
\secheadingbreak}% |
| 2825 : |
|
|
{\secfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
| 2826 : |
|
|
\parindent=0pt\raggedright |
| 2827 : |
|
|
\rm #1\hfill}}% |
| 2828 : |
|
|
\ifdim \parskip<10pt \kern 10pt\kern -\parskip\fi \penalty 10000 } |
| 2829 : |
|
|
|
| 2830 : |
|
|
|
| 2831 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Subsection fonts are the base font at magstep1, |
| 2832 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% which produces a size of 12 points. |
| 2833 : |
|
|
|
| 2834 : |
|
|
\def\subsecheading #1#2#3#4{\subsecheadingi {#2.#3.#4\enspace #1}} |
| 2835 : |
|
|
\def\subsecheadingi #1{{\advance \subsecheadingskip by \parskip % |
| 2836 : |
|
|
\subsecheadingbreak}% |
| 2837 : |
|
|
{\subsecfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
| 2838 : |
|
|
\parindent=0pt\raggedright |
| 2839 : |
|
|
\rm #1\hfill}}% |
| 2840 : |
|
|
\ifdim \parskip<10pt \kern 10pt\kern -\parskip\fi \penalty 10000 } |
| 2841 : |
|
|
|
| 2842 : |
|
|
\def\subsubsecfonts{\subsecfonts} % Maybe this should change: |
| 2843 : |
|
|
% Perhaps make sssec fonts scaled |
| 2844 : |
|
|
% magstep half |
| 2845 : |
|
|
\def\subsubsecheading #1#2#3#4#5{\subsubsecheadingi {#2.#3.#4.#5\enspace #1}} |
| 2846 : |
|
|
\def\subsubsecheadingi #1{{\advance \subsecheadingskip by \parskip % |
| 2847 : |
|
|
\subsecheadingbreak}% |
| 2848 : |
|
|
{\subsubsecfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
| 2849 : |
|
|
\parindent=0pt\raggedright |
| 2850 : |
|
|
\rm #1\hfill}}% |
| 2851 : |
|
|
\ifdim \parskip<10pt \kern 10pt\kern -\parskip\fi \penalty 10000} |
| 2852 : |
|
|
|
| 2853 : |
|
|
|
| 2854 : |
|
|
\message{toc printing,} |
| 2855 : |
|
|
|
| 2856 : |
|
|
% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written |
| 2857 : |
|
|
% to \contentsfile. |
| 2858 : |
|
|
|
| 2859 : |
|
|
\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in |
| 2860 : |
|
|
\def\startcontents#1{% |
| 2861 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\pagealignmacro |
| 2862 : |
|
|
\immediate\closeout \contentsfile |
| 2863 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\ifnum \pageno>0 |
| 2864 : |
|
|
\pageno = -1 % Request roman numbered pages. |
| 2865 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 2866 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. |
| 2867 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% It is abundantly clear what they are. |
| 2868 : |
|
|
\unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}% |
| 2869 : |
|
|
\begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. |
| 2870 : |
|
|
\catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11 |
| 2871 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi |
| 2872 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. |
| 2873 : |
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. |
| 2874 : |
|
|
} |
| 2875 : |
|
|
|
| 2876 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
|
| 2877 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% Normal (long) toc. |
| 2878 : |
|
|
\outer\def\contents{% |
| 2879 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\startcontents{\putwordTableofContents}% |
| 2880 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\input \jobname.toc |
| 2881 : |
|
|
\endgroup |
| 2882 : |
|
|
\vfill \eject |
| 2883 : |
|
|
} |
| 2884 : |
|
|
|
| 2885 : |
|
|
% And just the chapters. |
| 2886 : |
|
|
\outer\def\summarycontents{% |
| 2887 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\startcontents{\putwordShortContents}% |
| 2888 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% |
| 2889 : |
|
|
\let\chapentry = \shortchapentry |
| 2890 : |
|
|
\let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry |
| 2891 : |
|
|
% We want a true roman here for the page numbers. |
| 2892 : |
|
|
\secfonts |
| 2893 : |
|
|
\let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl |
| 2894 : |
|
|
\rm |
| 2895 : |
|
|
\advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. |
| 2896 : |
|
|
\def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{} |
| 2897 : |
|
|
\def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{} |
| 2898 : |
|
|
\def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{} |
| 2899 : |
|
|
\def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{} |
| 2900 : |
|
|
\def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{} |
| 2901 : |
|
|
\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{} |
| 2902 : |
|
|
\input \jobname.toc |
| 2903 : |
|
|
\endgroup |
| 2904 : |
|
|
\vfill \eject |
| 2905 : |
|
|
} |
| 2906 : |
|
|
\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents |
| 2907 : |
|
|
|
| 2908 : |
|
|
% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. |
| 2909 : |
|
|
% The first argument is the chapter or section name. |
| 2910 : |
|
|
% The last argument is the page number. |
| 2911 : |
|
|
% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... |
| 2912 : |
|
|
|
| 2913 : |
|
|
% Chapter-level things, for both the long and short contents. |
| 2914 : |
|
|
\def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}} |
| 2915 : |
|
|
|
| 2916 : |
|
|
% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings |
| 2917 : |
|
|
\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{% |
| 2918 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno{#3}}% |
| 2919 : |
|
|
} |
| 2920 : |
|
|
|
| 2921 : |
|
|
% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. |
| 2922 : |
|
|
% The arg is, e.g. `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. |
| 2923 : |
|
|
% We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry |
| 2924 : |
|
|
% command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry |
| 2925 : |
|
|
% for both, but it doesn't seem worth it. |
| 2926 : |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix } |
| 2927 : |
|
|
\newdimen\shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth = \wd0 |
| 2928 : |
|
|
|
| 2929 : |
|
|
\def\shortchaplabel#1{% |
| 2930 : |
|
|
% We typeset #1 in a box of constant width, regardless of the text of |
| 2931 : |
|
|
% #1, so the chapter titles will come out aligned. |
| 2932 : |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{#1}% |
| 2933 : |
|
|
\dimen0 = \ifdim\wd0 > \shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth \else 0pt \fi |
| 2934 : |
|
|
% |
| 2935 : |
|
|
% This space should be plenty, since a single number is .5em, and the |
| 2936 : |
|
|
% widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. |
| 2937 : |
|
|
% (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after |
| 2938 : |
|
|
% the label; that gets put in in \shortchapentry above.) |
| 2939 : |
|
|
\advance\dimen0 by 1.1em |
| 2940 : |
|
|
\hbox to \dimen0{#1\hfil}% |
| 2941 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
} |
| 2942 : |
|
|
|
| 2943 : |
|
|
\def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}} |
| 2944 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno{#2}}} |
| 2945 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 2946 : |
|
|
% Sections. |
| 2947 : |
|
|
\def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
| 2948 : |
|
|
\def\unnumbsecentry#1#2{\dosecentry{#1}{#2}} |
| 2949 : |
|
|
|
| 2950 : |
|
|
% Subsections. |
| 2951 : |
|
|
\def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}} |
| 2952 : |
|
|
\def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#2}} |
| 2953 : |
|
|
|
| 2954 : |
|
|
% And subsubsections. |
| 2955 : |
|
|
\def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{% |
| 2956 : |
|
|
\dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}} |
| 2957 : |
|
|
\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}} |
| 2958 : |
|
|
|
| 2959 : |
|
|
|
| 2960 : |
|
|
% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. |
| 2961 : |
|
|
\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc |
| 2962 : |
|
|
|
| 2963 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the |
| 2964 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% page number. |
| 2965 : |
|
|
% |
| 2966 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we would want to be at chapters |
| 2967 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% if at all possible; hence the \penalty. |
| 2968 : |
|
|
\def\dochapentry#1#2{% |
| 2969 : |
|
|
\penalty-300 \vskip\baselineskip |
| 2970 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\begingroup |
| 2971 : |
|
|
\chapentryfonts |
| 2972 : |
|
|
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}% |
| 2973 : |
|
|
\endgroup |
| 2974 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip |
| 2975 : |
|
|
} |
| 2976 : |
|
|
|
| 2977 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup |
| 2978 : |
|
|
\secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent |
| 2979 : |
|
|
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}% |
| 2980 : |
|
|
\endgroup} |
| 2981 : |
|
|
|
| 2982 : |
|
|
\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup |
| 2983 : |
|
|
\subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent |
| 2984 : |
|
|
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}% |
| 2985 : |
|
|
\endgroup} |
| 2986 : |
|
|
|
| 2987 : |
|
|
\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup |
| 2988 : |
|
|
\subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent |
| 2989 : |
|
|
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}% |
| 2990 : |
|
|
\endgroup} |
| 2991 : |
|
|
|
| 2992 : |
|
|
% Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for |
| 2993 : |
|
|
% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here. (We |
| 2994 : |
|
|
% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist |
| 2995 : |
|
|
% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.) |
| 2996 : |
|
|
% |
| 2997 : |
|
|
\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup |
| 2998 : |
|
|
\hyphenpenalty = 10000 |
| 2999 : |
|
|
\entry{#1}{#2}% |
| 3000 : |
|
|
\endgroup} |
| 3001 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 3002 : |
|
|
% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. |
| 3003 : |
|
|
\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} |
| 3004 : |
|
|
|
| 3005 : |
|
|
\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} |
| 3006 : |
|
|
\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} |
| 3007 : |
|
|
|
| 3008 : |
|
|
\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} |
| 3009 : |
|
|
\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} |
| 3010 : |
|
|
\let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts |
| 3011 : |
|
|
\let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts |
| 3012 : |
|
|
|
| 3013 : |
|
|
|
| 3014 : |
|
|
\message{environments,} |
| 3015 : |
|
|
|
| 3016 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of |
| 3017 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. |
| 3018 : |
|
|
% Furthermore, these definitions must come after we define our fonts. |
| 3019 : |
|
|
\newbox\dblarrowbox \newbox\longdblarrowbox |
| 3020 : |
|
|
\newbox\pushcharbox \newbox\bullbox |
| 3021 : |
|
|
\newbox\equivbox \newbox\errorbox |
| 3022 : |
|
|
|
| 3023 : |
|
|
\let\ptexequiv = \equiv |
| 3024 : |
|
|
|
| 3025 : |
|
|
%{\tentt |
| 3026 : |
|
|
%\global\setbox\dblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil} |
| 3027 : |
|
|
%\global\setbox\longdblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil} |
| 3028 : |
|
|
%\global\setbox\pushcharbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil} |
| 3029 : |
|
|
%\global\setbox\equivbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil} |
| 3030 : |
|
|
% Adapted from the manmac format (p.420 of TeXbook) |
| 3031 : |
|
|
%\global\setbox\bullbox = \hbox to 1em{\kern.15em\vrule height .75ex width .85ex |
| 3032 : |
|
|
% depth .1ex\hfil} |
| 3033 : |
|
|
%} |
| 3034 : |
|
|
|
| 3035 : |
|
|
\def\point{$\star$} |
| 3036 : |
|
|
|
| 3037 : |
|
|
\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} |
| 3038 : |
|
|
\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} |
| 3039 : |
|
|
\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} |
| 3040 : |
|
|
|
| 3041 : |
|
|
\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} |
| 3042 : |
|
|
|
| 3043 : |
|
|
% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. |
| 3044 : |
|
|
{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. |
| 3045 : |
|
|
\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules |
| 3046 : |
|
|
% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) |
| 3047 : |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt} |
| 3048 : |
|
|
|
| 3049 : |
|
|
\global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil |
| 3050 : |
|
|
\hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. |
| 3051 : |
|
|
\advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. |
| 3052 : |
|
|
\vbox{ |
| 3053 : |
|
|
\hrule height\dimen2 |
| 3054 : |
|
|
\hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. |
| 3055 : |
|
|
\vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. |
| 3056 : |
|
|
\kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. |
| 3057 : |
|
|
\hrule height\dimen2} |
| 3058 : |
|
|
\hfil} |
| 3059 : |
|
|
|
| 3060 : |
|
|
% The @error{} command. |
| 3061 : |
|
|
\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} |
| 3062 : |
|
|
|
| 3063 : |
|
|
% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily. |
| 3064 : |
|
|
% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. |
| 3065 : |
|
|
% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. |
| 3066 : |
|
|
|
| 3067 : |
|
|
\def\tex{\begingroup |
| 3068 : |
|
|
\catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 |
| 3069 : |
|
|
\catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 |
| 3070 : |
|
|
\catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie |
| 3071 : |
|
|
\catcode `\%=14 |
| 3072 : |
|
|
\catcode 43=12 |
| 3073 : |
|
|
\catcode`\"=12 |
| 3074 : |
|
|
\catcode`\==12 |
| 3075 : |
|
|
\catcode`\|=12 |
| 3076 : |
|
|
\catcode`\<=12 |
| 3077 : |
|
|
\catcode`\>=12 |
| 3078 : |
|
|
\escapechar=`\\ |
| 3079 : |
|
|
% |
| 3080 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\let\~=\ptextilde |
| 3081 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\let\{=\ptexlbrace |
| 3082 : |
|
|
\let\}=\ptexrbrace |
| 3083 : |
|
|
\let\.=\ptexdot |
| 3084 : |
|
|
\let\*=\ptexstar |
| 3085 : |
|
|
\let\dots=\ptexdots |
| 3086 : |
|
|
\def\@{@}% |
| 3087 : |
|
|
\let\bullet=\ptexbullet |
| 3088 : |
|
|
\let\b=\ptexb \let\c=\ptexc \let\i=\ptexi \let\t=\ptext \let\l=\ptexl |
| 3089 : |
|
|
\let\L=\ptexL |
| 3090 : |
|
|
% |
| 3091 : |
|
|
\let\Etex=\endgroup} |
| 3092 : |
|
|
|
| 3093 : |
|
|
% Define @lisp ... @endlisp. |
| 3094 : |
|
|
% @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things, |
| 3095 : |
|
|
% including the definition of @endlisp (which normally is erroneous). |
| 3096 : |
|
|
|
| 3097 : |
|
|
% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. |
| 3098 : |
|
|
\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in |
| 3099 : |
|
|
|
| 3100 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other |
| 3101 : |
|
|
% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't |
| 3102 : |
|
|
% have any width. |
| 3103 : |
|
|
\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} |
| 3104 : |
|
|
|
| 3105 : |
|
|
% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword |
| 3106 : |
|
|
% space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this |
| 3107 : |
|
|
% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input |
| 3108 : |
|
|
% should produce a line of output anyway. |
| 3109 : |
|
|
% |
| 3110 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
{\obeyspaces % |
| 3111 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}} |
| 3112 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 3113 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is. This is |
| 3114 : |
|
|
% for use in \parsearg. |
| 3115 : |
|
|
{\sepspaces% |
| 3116 : |
|
|
\global\let\obeyedspace= } |
| 3117 : |
|
|
|
| 3118 : |
|
|
% This space is always present above and below environments. |
| 3119 : |
|
|
\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt |
| 3120 : |
|
|
|
| 3121 : |
|
|
% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here |
| 3122 : |
|
|
% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip |
| 3123 : |
|
|
% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the |
| 3124 : |
|
|
% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip |
| 3125 : |
|
|
% |
| 3126 : |
|
|
\def\aboveenvbreak{{\advance\envskipamount by \parskip |
| 3127 : |
|
|
\endgraf \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount |
| 3128 : |
|
|
\removelastskip \penalty-50 \vskip\envskipamount \fi}} |
| 3129 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 3130 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak |
| 3131 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 3132 : |
|
|
% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins. |
| 3133 : |
|
|
\let\nonarrowing=\relax |
| 3134 : |
|
|
|
| 3135 : |
|
|
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% |
| 3136 : |
|
|
% \cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around argument |
| 3137 : |
|
|
\font\circle=lcircle10 |
| 3138 : |
|
|
\newdimen\circthick |
| 3139 : |
|
|
\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner |
| 3140 : |
|
|
\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip |
| 3141 : |
|
|
\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle |
| 3142 : |
|
|
% |
| 3143 : |
|
|
\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth |
| 3144 : |
|
|
\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} |
| 3145 : |
|
|
\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} |
| 3146 : |
|
|
\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} |
| 3147 : |
|
|
\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip |
| 3148 : |
|
|
\ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr |
| 3149 : |
|
|
\hskip\rskip}} |
| 3150 : |
|
|
\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip |
| 3151 : |
|
|
\cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr |
| 3152 : |
|
|
\hskip\rskip}} |
| 3153 : |
|
|
% |
| 3154 : |
|
|
\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip |
| 3155 : |
|
|
|
| 3156 : |
|
|
\long\def\cartouche{% |
| 3157 : |
|
|
\begingroup |
| 3158 : |
|
|
\lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip |
| 3159 : |
|
|
\leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*. |
| 3160 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip |
| 3161 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\advance\cartinner by-\rskip |
| 3162 : |
|
|
\cartouter=\hsize |
| 3163 : |
|
|
\advance\cartouter by 18pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either |
| 3164 : |
|
|
% side, and for 6pt waste from |
| 3165 : |
|
|
% each corner char |
| 3166 : |
|
|
\normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip |
| 3167 : |
|
|
% Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. |
| 3168 : |
|
|
\let\nonarrowing=\comment |
| 3169 : |
|
|
\vbox\bgroup |
| 3170 : |
|
|
\baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt |
| 3171 : |
|
|
\carttop |
| 3172 : |
|
|
\hbox\bgroup |
| 3173 : |
|
|
\hskip\lskip |
| 3174 : |
|
|
\vrule\kern3pt |
| 3175 : |
|
|
\vbox\bgroup |
| 3176 : |
|
|
\hsize=\cartinner |
| 3177 : |
|
|
\kern3pt |
| 3178 : |
|
|
\begingroup |
| 3179 : |
|
|
\baselineskip=\normbskip |
| 3180 : |
|
|
\lineskip=\normlskip |
| 3181 : |
|
|
\parskip=\normpskip |
| 3182 : |
|
|
\vskip -\parskip |
| 3183 : |
|
|
\def\Ecartouche{% |
| 3184 : |
|
|
\endgroup |
| 3185 : |
|
|
\kern3pt |
| 3186 : |
|
|
\egroup |
| 3187 : |
|
|
\kern3pt\vrule |
| 3188 : |
|
|
\hskip\rskip |
| 3189 : |
|
|
\egroup |
| 3190 : |
|
|
\cartbot |
| 3191 : |
|
|
\egroup |
| 3192 : |
|
|
\endgroup |
| 3193 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
}} |
| 3194 : |
|
|
|
| 3195 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 3196 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, |
| 3197 : |
|
|
% inside a group. |
| 3198 : |
|
|
\def\nonfillstart{% |
| 3199 : |
|
|
\aboveenvbreak |
| 3200 : |
|
|
\inENV % This group ends at the end of the body |
| 3201 : |
|
|
\hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy |
| 3202 : |
|
|
\sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. |
| 3203 : |
|
|
\singlespace |
| 3204 : |
|
|
\let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines |
| 3205 : |
|
|
\obeylines % each line of input is a line of output |
| 3206 : |
|
|
\parskip = 0pt |
| 3207 : |
|
|
\parindent = 0pt |
| 3208 : |
|
|
\emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes |
| 3209 : |
|
|
% @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing |
| 3210 : |
|
|
% at next level down. |
| 3211 : |
|
|
\ifx\nonarrowing\relax |
| 3212 : |
|
|
\advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing |
| 3213 : |
|
|
\exdentamount=\lispnarrowing |
| 3214 : |
|
|
\let\exdent=\nofillexdent |
| 3215 : |
|
|
\let\nonarrowing=\relax |
| 3216 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 3217 : |
|
|
} |
| 3218 : |
|
|
|
| 3219 : |
|
|
% To ending an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph |
| 3220 : |
|
|
% (via \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group. That way we |
| 3221 : |
|
|
% keep the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue |
| 3222 : |
|
|
% will be inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the |
| 3223 : |
|
|
% document, after the environment. |
| 3224 : |
|
|
% |
| 3225 : |
|
|
\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% |
| 3226 : |
|
|
|
| 3227 : |
|
|
% This macro is |
| 3228 : |
|
|
\def\lisp{\begingroup |
| 3229 : |
|
|
\nonfillstart |
| 3230 : |
|
|
\let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish |
| 3231 : |
|
|
\tt |
| 3232 : |
|
|
\rawbackslash % have \ input char produce \ char from current font |
| 3233 : |
|
|
\gobble |
| 3234 : |
|
|
} |
| 3235 : |
|
|
|
| 3236 : |
|
|
% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the |
| 3237 : |
|
|
% environment, so the error checking in \end will work. |
| 3238 : |
|
|
% |
| 3239 : |
|
|
% We must call \lisp last in the definition, since it reads the |
| 3240 : |
|
|
% return following the @example (or whatever) command. |
| 3241 : |
|
|
% |
| 3242 : |
|
|
\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} |
| 3243 : |
|
|
\def\smallexample{\begingroup \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} |
| 3244 : |
|
|
\def\smalllisp{\begingroup \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} |
| 3245 : |
|
|
|
| 3246 : |
|
|
% @smallexample and @smalllisp. This is not used unless the @smallbook |
| 3247 : |
|
|
% command is given. Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. |
| 3248 : |
|
|
% |
| 3249 : |
|
|
\def\smalllispx{\begingroup |
| 3250 : |
|
|
\nonfillstart |
| 3251 : |
|
|
\let\Esmalllisp = \nonfillfinish |
| 3252 : |
|
|
\let\Esmallexample = \nonfillfinish |
| 3253 : |
|
|
% |
| 3254 : |
|
|
% Smaller interline space and fonts for small examples. |
| 3255 : |
|
|
\setleading{10pt}% |
| 3256 : |
|
|
\indexfonts \tt |
| 3257 : |
|
|
\rawbackslash % make \ output the \ character from the current font (tt) |
| 3258 : |
|
|
\gobble |
| 3259 : |
|
|
} |
| 3260 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 3261 : |
|
|
% This is @display; same as @lisp except use roman font. |
| 3262 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 3263 : |
|
|
\def\display{\begingroup |
| 3264 : |
|
|
\nonfillstart |
| 3265 : |
|
|
\let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish |
| 3266 : |
|
|
\gobble |
| 3267 : |
|
|
} |
| 3268 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 3269 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% This is @format; same as @display except don't narrow margins. |
| 3270 : |
|
|
% |
| 3271 : |
|
|
\def\format{\begingroup |
| 3272 : |
|
|
\let\nonarrowing = t |
| 3273 : |
|
|
\nonfillstart |
| 3274 : |
|
|
\let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish |
| 3275 : |
|
|
\gobble |
| 3276 : |
|
|
} |
| 3277 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 3278 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% @flushleft (same as @format) and @flushright. |
| 3279 : |
|
|
% |
| 3280 : |
|
|
\def\flushleft{\begingroup |
| 3281 : |
|
|
\let\nonarrowing = t |
| 3282 : |
|
|
\nonfillstart |
| 3283 : |
|
|
\let\Eflushleft = \nonfillfinish |
| 3284 : |
|
|
\gobble |
| 3285 : |
|
|
} |
| 3286 : |
|
|
\def\flushright{\begingroup |
| 3287 : |
|
|
\let\nonarrowing = t |
| 3288 : |
|
|
\nonfillstart |
| 3289 : |
|
|
\let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish |
| 3290 : |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill |
| 3291 : |
|
|
\gobble} |
| 3292 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 3293 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) |
| 3294 : |
|
|
% and narrows the margins. |
| 3295 : |
|
|
% |
| 3296 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\quotation{% |
| 3297 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body |
| 3298 : |
|
|
{\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip |
| 3299 : |
|
|
\singlespace |
| 3300 : |
|
|
\parindent=0pt |
| 3301 : |
|
|
% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're |
| 3302 : |
|
|
% doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment... |
| 3303 : |
|
|
\def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}% |
| 3304 : |
|
|
% |
| 3305 : |
|
|
% @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. |
| 3306 : |
|
|
\ifx\nonarrowing\relax |
| 3307 : |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing |
| 3308 : |
|
|
\advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing |
| 3309 : |
|
|
\exdentamount = \lispnarrowing |
| 3310 : |
|
|
\let\nonarrowing = \relax |
| 3311 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 3312 : |
|
|
} |
| 3313 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 3314 : |
|
|
\message{defuns,} |
| 3315 : |
|
|
% Define formatter for defuns |
| 3316 : |
|
|
% First, allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally |
| 3317 : |
|
|
\def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname} |
| 3318 : |
|
|
|
| 3319 : |
|
|
\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in |
| 3320 : |
|
|
\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt |
| 3321 : |
|
|
\newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt |
| 3322 : |
|
|
\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt |
| 3323 : |
|
|
|
| 3324 : |
|
|
\newcount\parencount |
| 3325 : |
|
|
% define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things. |
| 3326 : |
|
|
% \functionparens affects the group it is contained in. |
| 3327 : |
|
|
\def\activeparens{% |
| 3328 : |
|
|
\catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active |
| 3329 : |
|
|
\catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active} |
| 3330 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
|
| 3331 : |
|
|
% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. |
| 3332 : |
|
|
\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) |
| 3333 : |
|
|
|
| 3334 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
{\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm) |
| 3335 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
|
| 3336 : |
|
|
% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, |
| 3337 : |
|
|
% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, |
| 3338 : |
|
|
% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. |
| 3339 : |
|
|
\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen |
| 3340 : |
|
|
\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack |
| 3341 : |
|
|
|
| 3342 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 } |
| 3343 : |
|
|
\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} |
| 3344 : |
|
|
|
| 3345 : |
|
|
% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions. |
| 3346 : |
|
|
% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses. |
| 3347 : |
|
|
\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested % |
| 3348 : |
|
|
\global\advance\parencount by 1 } |
| 3349 : |
|
|
% |
| 3350 : |
|
|
% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens. |
| 3351 : |
|
|
\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 } |
| 3352 : |
|
|
% |
| 3353 : |
|
|
\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0. |
| 3354 : |
|
|
% also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (. |
| 3355 : |
|
|
\ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi |
| 3356 : |
|
|
\global\advance \parencount by -1 } |
| 3357 : |
|
|
% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards |
| 3358 : |
|
|
\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ } |
| 3359 : |
|
|
% |
| 3360 : |
|
|
\gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr} |
| 3361 : |
|
|
} % End of definition inside \activeparens |
| 3362 : |
|
|
%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the |
| 3363 : |
|
|
%% contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] |
| 3364 : |
|
|
\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}} \def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}} \def\ampnr{\&} |
| 3365 : |
|
|
\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}} \def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}} |
| 3366 : |
|
|
|
| 3367 : |
|
|
% First, defname, which formats the header line itself. |
| 3368 : |
|
|
% #1 should be the function name. |
| 3369 : |
|
|
% #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function". |
| 3370 : |
|
|
|
| 3371 : |
|
|
\def\defname #1#2{% |
| 3372 : |
|
|
% Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were |
| 3373 : |
|
|
% outside the @def... |
| 3374 : |
|
|
\dimen2=\leftskip |
| 3375 : |
|
|
\advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent |
| 3376 : |
|
|
\dimen3=\rightskip |
| 3377 : |
|
|
\advance\dimen3 by -\defbodyindent |
| 3378 : |
|
|
\noindent % |
| 3379 : |
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}% |
| 3380 : |
|
|
\dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line |
| 3381 : |
|
|
\dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations |
| 3382 : |
|
|
\parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1 % |
| 3383 : |
|
|
% Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such) |
| 3384 : |
|
|
% ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin, |
| 3385 : |
|
|
% but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking |
| 3386 : |
|
|
{% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins, |
| 3387 : |
|
|
% so that \rightline will obey them. |
| 3388 : |
|
|
\advance \hsize by -\dimen2 \advance \hsize by -\dimen3 |
| 3389 : |
|
|
\rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}}}% |
| 3390 : |
|
|
% Make all lines underfull and no complaints: |
| 3391 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 |
| 3392 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent |
| 3393 : |
|
|
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
| 3394 : |
|
|
{\df #1}\enskip % Generate function name |
| 3395 : |
|
|
} |
| 3396 : |
|
|
|
| 3397 : |
|
|
% Actually process the body of a definition |
| 3398 : |
|
|
% #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun. |
| 3399 : |
|
|
% #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx. |
| 3400 : |
|
|
% #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header, |
| 3401 : |
|
|
% such as \defunheader. |
| 3402 : |
|
|
|
| 3403 : |
|
|
\def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody |
| 3404 : |
|
|
\medbreak % |
| 3405 : |
|
|
% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies |
| 3406 : |
|
|
% so that it will exit this group. |
| 3407 : |
|
|
\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
| 3408 : |
|
|
\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}% |
| 3409 : |
|
|
\parindent=0in |
| 3410 : |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent |
| 3411 : |
|
|
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
| 3412 : |
|
|
\begingroup % |
| 3413 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\catcode 61=\active % 61 is `=' |
| 3414 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3} |
| 3415 : |
|
|
|
| 3416 : |
|
|
\def\defmethparsebody #1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV % |
| 3417 : |
|
|
\medbreak % |
| 3418 : |
|
|
% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies |
| 3419 : |
|
|
% so that it will exit this group. |
| 3420 : |
|
|
\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
| 3421 : |
|
|
\def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% |
| 3422 : |
|
|
\parindent=0in |
| 3423 : |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent |
| 3424 : |
|
|
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
| 3425 : |
|
|
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}} |
| 3426 : |
|
|
|
| 3427 : |
|
|
\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV % |
| 3428 : |
|
|
\medbreak % |
| 3429 : |
|
|
% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies |
| 3430 : |
|
|
% so that it will exit this group. |
| 3431 : |
|
|
\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
| 3432 : |
|
|
\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}% |
| 3433 : |
|
|
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}% |
| 3434 : |
|
|
\parindent=0in |
| 3435 : |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent |
| 3436 : |
|
|
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
| 3437 : |
|
|
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}} |
| 3438 : |
|
|
|
| 3439 : |
|
|
% These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones |
| 3440 : |
|
|
% except that they do not make parens into active characters. |
| 3441 : |
|
|
% These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments. |
| 3442 : |
|
|
|
| 3443 : |
|
|
\def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody |
| 3444 : |
|
|
\medbreak % |
| 3445 : |
|
|
% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies |
| 3446 : |
|
|
% so that it will exit this group. |
| 3447 : |
|
|
\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
| 3448 : |
|
|
\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}% |
| 3449 : |
|
|
\parindent=0in |
| 3450 : |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent |
| 3451 : |
|
|
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
| 3452 : |
|
|
\begingroup % |
| 3453 : |
|
|
\catcode 61=\active % |
| 3454 : |
|
|
\obeylines\spacesplit#3} |
| 3455 : |
|
|
|
| 3456 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody. It could probably be used for |
| 3457 : |
|
|
% some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals. |
| 3458 : |
|
|
% |
| 3459 : |
|
|
\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{% |
| 3460 : |
|
|
\begingroup\inENV % |
| 3461 : |
|
|
\medbreak % |
| 3462 : |
|
|
% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies |
| 3463 : |
|
|
% so that it will exit this group. |
| 3464 : |
|
|
\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
| 3465 : |
|
|
\def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% |
| 3466 : |
|
|
\parindent=0in |
| 3467 : |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent |
| 3468 : |
|
|
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
| 3469 : |
|
|
\begingroup\obeylines |
| 3470 : |
|
|
} |
| 3471 : |
|
|
|
| 3472 : |
|
|
\def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {% |
| 3473 : |
|
|
\parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}% |
| 3474 : |
|
|
\spacesplit{#3{#4}}% |
| 3475 : |
|
|
} |
| 3476 : |
|
|
|
| 3477 : |
|
|
% This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the |
| 3478 : |
|
|
% type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct |
| 3479 : |
|
|
% termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument. Sigh. |
| 3480 : |
|
|
% \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody |
| 3481 : |
|
|
% |
| 3482 : |
|
|
% So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name. That |
| 3483 : |
|
|
% way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and |
| 3484 : |
|
|
% won't strip off the braces. |
| 3485 : |
|
|
% |
| 3486 : |
|
|
\def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {% |
| 3487 : |
|
|
\parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}% |
| 3488 : |
|
|
\spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty |
| 3489 : |
|
|
} |
| 3490 : |
|
|
|
| 3491 : |
|
|
% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the |
| 3492 : |
|
|
% braces (if any). That's what this does, putting the result in \tptemp. |
| 3493 : |
|
|
% |
| 3494 : |
|
|
\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{\def\tptemp{#1}}% |
| 3495 : |
|
|
|
| 3496 : |
|
|
% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final |
| 3497 : |
|
|
% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3 |
| 3498 : |
|
|
% (which might be empty) the arguments. |
| 3499 : |
|
|
% |
| 3500 : |
|
|
\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{% |
| 3501 : |
|
|
\removeemptybraces#2\relax |
| 3502 : |
|
|
#1{\tptemp}{#3}% |
| 3503 : |
|
|
}% |
| 3504 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 3505 : |
|
|
\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV % |
| 3506 : |
|
|
\medbreak % |
| 3507 : |
|
|
% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies |
| 3508 : |
|
|
% so that it will exit this group. |
| 3509 : |
|
|
\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
| 3510 : |
|
|
\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}% |
| 3511 : |
|
|
\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}% |
| 3512 : |
|
|
\parindent=0in |
| 3513 : |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent |
| 3514 : |
|
|
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
| 3515 : |
|
|
\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}} |
| 3516 : |
|
|
|
| 3517 : |
|
|
% Split up #2 at the first space token. |
| 3518 : |
|
|
% call #1 with two arguments: |
| 3519 : |
|
|
% the first is all of #2 before the space token, |
| 3520 : |
|
|
% the second is all of #2 after that space token. |
| 3521 : |
|
|
% If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg |
| 3522 : |
|
|
% and the second is passed as empty. |
| 3523 : |
|
|
|
| 3524 : |
|
|
{\obeylines |
| 3525 : |
|
|
\gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}% |
| 3526 : |
|
|
\long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{% |
| 3527 : |
|
|
\ifx\relax #3% |
| 3528 : |
|
|
#1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}} |
| 3529 : |
|
|
|
| 3530 : |
|
|
% So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions. |
| 3531 : |
|
|
|
| 3532 : |
|
|
% Define @defun. |
| 3533 : |
|
|
|
| 3534 : |
|
|
% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun |
| 3535 : |
|
|
% Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up |
| 3536 : |
|
|
|
| 3537 : |
|
|
\def\defunargs #1{\functionparens \sl |
| 3538 : |
|
|
% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars. |
| 3539 : |
|
|
% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar. |
| 3540 : |
|
|
\hyphenchar\tensl=0 |
| 3541 : |
|
|
#1% |
| 3542 : |
|
|
\hyphenchar\tensl=45 |
| 3543 : |
|
|
\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{unbalanced parens in @def arguments}\fi% |
| 3544 : |
|
|
\interlinepenalty=10000 |
| 3545 : |
|
|
\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil |
| 3546 : |
|
|
\endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000% |
| 3547 : |
|
|
} |
| 3548 : |
|
|
|
| 3549 : |
|
|
\def\deftypefunargs #1{% |
| 3550 : |
|
|
% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars. |
| 3551 : |
|
|
% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar. |
| 3552 : |
|
|
\functionparens |
| 3553 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars |
| 3554 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\interlinepenalty=10000 |
| 3555 : |
|
|
\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil |
| 3556 : |
|
|
\endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000% |
| 3557 : |
|
|
} |
| 3558 : |
|
|
|
| 3559 : |
|
|
% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed. |
| 3560 : |
|
|
|
| 3561 : |
|
|
% @deffn Command forward-char nchars |
| 3562 : |
|
|
|
| 3563 : |
|
|
\def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader} |
| 3564 : |
|
|
|
| 3565 : |
|
|
\def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% |
| 3566 : |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup % |
| 3567 : |
|
|
\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody |
| 3568 : |
|
|
} |
| 3569 : |
|
|
|
| 3570 : |
|
|
% @defun == @deffn Function |
| 3571 : |
|
|
|
| 3572 : |
|
|
\def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader} |
| 3573 : |
|
|
|
| 3574 : |
|
|
\def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index |
| 3575 : |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {#1}{Function}% |
| 3576 : |
|
|
\defunargs {#2}\endgroup % |
| 3577 : |
|
|
\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody |
| 3578 : |
|
|
} |
| 3579 : |
|
|
|
| 3580 : |
|
|
% @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar}) |
| 3581 : |
|
|
|
| 3582 : |
|
|
\def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader} |
| 3583 : |
|
|
|
| 3584 : |
|
|
% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name and args. |
| 3585 : |
|
|
\def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax} |
| 3586 : |
|
|
% #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args. |
| 3587 : |
|
|
\def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{% |
| 3588 : |
|
|
\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index |
| 3589 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Function}% |
| 3590 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup % |
| 3591 : |
|
|
\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody |
| 3592 : |
|
|
} |
| 3593 : |
|
|
|
| 3594 : |
|
|
% @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar}) |
| 3595 : |
|
|
|
| 3596 : |
|
|
\def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader} |
| 3597 : |
|
|
|
| 3598 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% \defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$ |
| 3599 : |
|
|
% puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null. |
| 3600 : |
|
|
\def\defheaderxcond#1#2$$${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi} |
| 3601 : |
|
|
|
| 3602 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% #1 is the classification. #2 is the data type. #3 is the name and args. |
| 3603 : |
|
|
\def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax} |
| 3604 : |
|
|
% #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args. |
| 3605 : |
|
|
\def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{% |
| 3606 : |
|
|
\doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index |
| 3607 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\begingroup |
| 3608 : |
|
|
\normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents |
| 3609 : |
|
|
% at least some C++ text from working |
| 3610 : |
|
|
\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}% |
| 3611 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup % |
| 3612 : |
|
|
\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody |
| 3613 : |
|
|
} |
| 3614 : |
|
|
|
| 3615 : |
|
|
% @defmac == @deffn Macro |
| 3616 : |
|
|
|
| 3617 : |
|
|
\def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader} |
| 3618 : |
|
|
|
| 3619 : |
|
|
\def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index |
| 3620 : |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {#1}{Macro}% |
| 3621 : |
|
|
\defunargs {#2}\endgroup % |
| 3622 : |
|
|
\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody |
| 3623 : |
|
|
} |
| 3624 : |
|
|
|
| 3625 : |
|
|
% @defspec == @deffn Special Form |
| 3626 : |
|
|
|
| 3627 : |
|
|
\def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader} |
| 3628 : |
|
|
|
| 3629 : |
|
|
\def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index |
| 3630 : |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {#1}{Special Form}% |
| 3631 : |
|
|
\defunargs {#2}\endgroup % |
| 3632 : |
|
|
\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody |
| 3633 : |
|
|
} |
| 3634 : |
|
|
|
| 3635 : |
|
|
% This definition is run if you use @defunx |
| 3636 : |
|
|
% anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx. |
| 3637 : |
|
|
|
| 3638 : |
|
|
\def\deffnx #1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}} |
| 3639 : |
|
|
\def\defunx #1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}} |
| 3640 : |
|
|
\def\defmacx #1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}} |
| 3641 : |
|
|
\def\defspecx #1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}} |
| 3642 : |
|
|
\def\deftypefnx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}} |
| 3643 : |
|
|
\def\deftypeunx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypeunx in invalid context}} |
| 3644 : |
|
|
|
| 3645 : |
|
|
% @defmethod, and so on |
| 3646 : |
|
|
|
| 3647 : |
|
|
% @defop {Funny Method} foo-class frobnicate argument |
| 3648 : |
|
|
|
| 3649 : |
|
|
\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}% |
| 3650 : |
|
|
\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype} |
| 3651 : |
|
|
|
| 3652 : |
|
|
\def\defopheader #1#2#3{% |
| 3653 : |
|
|
\dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{on #1}% Make entry in function index |
| 3654 : |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype{} on #1}% |
| 3655 : |
|
|
\defunargs {#3}\endgroup % |
| 3656 : |
|
|
} |
| 3657 : |
|
|
|
| 3658 : |
|
|
% @defmethod == @defop Method |
| 3659 : |
|
|
|
| 3660 : |
|
|
\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader} |
| 3661 : |
|
|
|
| 3662 : |
|
|
\def\defmethodheader #1#2#3{% |
| 3663 : |
|
|
\dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{on #1}% entry in function index |
| 3664 : |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {#2}{Method on #1}% |
| 3665 : |
|
|
\defunargs {#3}\endgroup % |
| 3666 : |
|
|
} |
| 3667 : |
|
|
|
| 3668 : |
|
|
% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag |
| 3669 : |
|
|
|
| 3670 : |
|
|
\def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}% |
| 3671 : |
|
|
\defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype} |
| 3672 : |
|
|
|
| 3673 : |
|
|
\def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{% |
| 3674 : |
|
|
\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index |
| 3675 : |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype{} of #1}% |
| 3676 : |
|
|
\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup % |
| 3677 : |
|
|
} |
| 3678 : |
|
|
|
| 3679 : |
|
|
% @defivar == @defcv {Instance Variable} |
| 3680 : |
|
|
|
| 3681 : |
|
|
\def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader} |
| 3682 : |
|
|
|
| 3683 : |
|
|
\def\defivarheader #1#2#3{% |
| 3684 : |
|
|
\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index |
| 3685 : |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {#2}{Instance Variable of #1}% |
| 3686 : |
|
|
\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup % |
| 3687 : |
|
|
} |
| 3688 : |
|
|
|
| 3689 : |
|
|
% These definitions are run if you use @defmethodx, etc., |
| 3690 : |
|
|
% anywhere other than immediately after a @defmethod, etc. |
| 3691 : |
|
|
|
| 3692 : |
|
|
\def\defopx #1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}} |
| 3693 : |
|
|
\def\defmethodx #1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}} |
| 3694 : |
|
|
\def\defcvx #1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}} |
| 3695 : |
|
|
\def\defivarx #1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}} |
| 3696 : |
|
|
|
| 3697 : |
|
|
% Now @defvar |
| 3698 : |
|
|
|
| 3699 : |
|
|
% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar. |
| 3700 : |
|
|
% This is actually simple: just print them in roman. |
| 3701 : |
|
|
% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up |
| 3702 : |
|
|
\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1% |
| 3703 : |
|
|
\interlinepenalty=10000 |
| 3704 : |
|
|
\endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000} |
| 3705 : |
|
|
|
| 3706 : |
|
|
% @defvr Counter foo-count |
| 3707 : |
|
|
|
| 3708 : |
|
|
\def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader} |
| 3709 : |
|
|
|
| 3710 : |
|
|
\def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}% |
| 3711 : |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup} |
| 3712 : |
|
|
|
| 3713 : |
|
|
% @defvar == @defvr Variable |
| 3714 : |
|
|
|
| 3715 : |
|
|
\def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader} |
| 3716 : |
|
|
|
| 3717 : |
|
|
\def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index |
| 3718 : |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {#1}{Variable}% |
| 3719 : |
|
|
\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup % |
| 3720 : |
|
|
} |
| 3721 : |
|
|
|
| 3722 : |
|
|
% @defopt == @defvr {User Option} |
| 3723 : |
|
|
|
| 3724 : |
|
|
\def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader} |
| 3725 : |
|
|
|
| 3726 : |
|
|
\def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index |
| 3727 : |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {#1}{User Option}% |
| 3728 : |
|
|
\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup % |
| 3729 : |
|
|
} |
| 3730 : |
|
|
|
| 3731 : |
|
|
% @deftypevar int foobar |
| 3732 : |
|
|
|
| 3733 : |
|
|
\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader} |
| 3734 : |
|
|
|
| 3735 : |
|
|
% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name. |
| 3736 : |
|
|
\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{% |
| 3737 : |
|
|
\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in variables index |
| 3738 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Variable}% |
| 3739 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\interlinepenalty=10000 |
| 3740 : |
|
|
\endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000 |
| 3741 : |
|
|
\endgroup} |
| 3742 : |
|
|
|
| 3743 : |
|
|
% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable |
| 3744 : |
|
|
|
| 3745 : |
|
|
\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader} |
| 3746 : |
|
|
|
| 3747 : |
|
|
\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#3}}% |
| 3748 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1} |
| 3749 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\interlinepenalty=10000 |
| 3750 : |
|
|
\endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000 |
| 3751 : |
|
|
\endgroup} |
| 3752 : |
|
|
|
| 3753 : |
|
|
% This definition is run if you use @defvarx |
| 3754 : |
|
|
% anywhere other than immediately after a @defvar or @defvarx. |
| 3755 : |
|
|
|
| 3756 : |
|
|
\def\defvrx #1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}} |
| 3757 : |
|
|
\def\defvarx #1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}} |
| 3758 : |
|
|
\def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}} |
| 3759 : |
|
|
\def\deftypevarx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}} |
| 3760 : |
|
|
\def\deftypevrx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}} |
| 3761 : |
|
|
|
| 3762 : |
|
|
% Now define @deftp |
| 3763 : |
|
|
% Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar. |
| 3764 : |
|
|
|
| 3765 : |
|
|
\def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}} |
| 3766 : |
|
|
|
| 3767 : |
|
|
% @deftp Class window height width ... |
| 3768 : |
|
|
|
| 3769 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader} |
| 3770 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 3771 : |
|
|
\def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}% |
| 3772 : |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup} |
| 3773 : |
|
|
|
| 3774 : |
|
|
% This definition is run if you use @deftpx, etc |
| 3775 : |
|
|
% anywhere other than immediately after a @deftp, etc. |
| 3776 : |
|
|
|
| 3777 : |
|
|
\def\deftpx #1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}} |
| 3778 : |
|
|
|
| 3779 : |
|
|
\message{cross reference,} |
| 3780 : |
|
|
% Define cross-reference macros |
| 3781 : |
|
|
\newwrite \auxfile |
| 3782 : |
|
|
|
| 3783 : |
|
|
\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. |
| 3784 : |
|
|
\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. |
| 3785 : |
|
|
|
| 3786 : |
|
|
% \setref{foo} defines a cross-reference point named foo. |
| 3787 : |
|
|
|
| 3788 : |
|
|
\def\setref#1{% |
| 3789 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}% |
| 3790 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}% |
| 3791 : |
|
|
\dosetq{#1-snt}{Ysectionnumberandtype}} |
| 3792 : |
|
|
|
| 3793 : |
|
|
\def\unnumbsetref#1{% |
| 3794 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}% |
| 3795 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}% |
| 3796 : |
|
|
\dosetq{#1-snt}{Ynothing}} |
| 3797 : |
|
|
|
| 3798 : |
|
|
\def\appendixsetref#1{% |
| 3799 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}% |
| 3800 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}% |
| 3801 : |
|
|
\dosetq{#1-snt}{Yappendixletterandtype}} |
| 3802 : |
|
|
|
| 3803 : |
|
|
% \xref, \pxref, and \ref generate cross-references to specified points. |
| 3804 : |
|
|
% For \xrefX, #1 is the node name, #2 the name of the Info |
| 3805 : |
|
|
% cross-reference, #3 the printed node name, #4 the name of the Info |
| 3806 : |
|
|
% file, #5 the name of the printed manual. All but the node name can be |
| 3807 : |
|
|
% omitted. |
| 3808 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 3809 : |
|
|
\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} |
| 3810 : |
|
|
\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} |
| 3811 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} |
| 3812 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup |
| 3813 : |
|
|
\def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% |
| 3814 : |
|
|
\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}% |
| 3815 : |
|
|
\setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}% |
| 3816 : |
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}% |
| 3817 : |
|
|
\ifdim \wd0 = 0pt |
| 3818 : |
|
|
% No printed node name was explicitly given. |
| 3819 : |
|
|
\ifx\SETxref-automatic-section-title\relax % |
| 3820 : |
|
|
% Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside |
| 3821 : |
|
|
% the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. |
| 3822 : |
|
|
\ifdim \wd1>0pt% |
| 3823 : |
|
|
% It is in another manual, so we don't have it. |
| 3824 : |
|
|
\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% |
| 3825 : |
|
|
\else |
| 3826 : |
|
|
\ifhavexrefs |
| 3827 : |
|
|
% We know the real title if we have the xref values. |
| 3828 : |
|
|
\def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}}% |
| 3829 : |
|
|
\else |
| 3830 : |
|
|
% Otherwise just copy the Info node name. |
| 3831 : |
|
|
\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% |
| 3832 : |
|
|
\fi% |
| 3833 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 3834 : |
|
|
\def\printednodename{#1-title}% |
| 3835 : |
|
|
\else |
| 3836 : |
|
|
% Use the node name inside the square brackets. |
| 3837 : |
|
|
\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% |
| 3838 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 3839 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 3840 : |
|
|
% |
| 3841 : |
|
|
% If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not |
| 3842 : |
|
|
% insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will |
| 3843 : |
|
|
% not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals |
| 3844 : |
|
|
% are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this |
| 3845 : |
|
|
% is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it |
| 3846 : |
|
|
% is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. |
| 3847 : |
|
|
\ifdim \wd1 > 0pt |
| 3848 : |
|
|
\putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' in \cite{\printedmanual}% |
| 3849 : |
|
|
\else |
| 3850 : |
|
|
% _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the |
| 3851 : |
|
|
% control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand |
| 3852 : |
|
|
% into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of |
| 3853 : |
|
|
% printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the |
| 3854 : |
|
|
% printing, back off for the \refx-pg. |
| 3855 : |
|
|
{\turnoffactive \refx{#1-snt}{}}% |
| 3856 : |
|
|
\space [\printednodename],\space |
| 3857 : |
|
|
\turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% |
| 3858 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 3859 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\endgroup} |
| 3860 : |
|
|
|
| 3861 : |
|
|
% \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros |
| 3862 : |
|
|
|
| 3863 : |
|
|
% Use \turnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore |
| 3864 : |
|
|
% work in node names. |
| 3865 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\dosetq #1#2{{\let\folio=0 \turnoffactive \auxhat% |
| 3866 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq {#1}{#2}}}% |
| 3867 : |
|
|
\next}} |
| 3868 : |
|
|
|
| 3869 : |
|
|
% \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into |
| 3870 : |
|
|
% CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...} |
| 3871 : |
|
|
% When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character |
| 3872 : |
|
|
|
| 3873 : |
|
|
\def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}} |
| 3874 : |
|
|
|
| 3875 : |
|
|
% Things to be expanded by \internalsetq |
| 3876 : |
|
|
|
| 3877 : |
|
|
\def\Ypagenumber{\folio} |
| 3878 : |
|
|
|
| 3879 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\Ytitle{\thissection} |
| 3880 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 3881 : |
|
|
\def\Ynothing{} |
| 3882 : |
|
|
|
| 3883 : |
|
|
\def\Ysectionnumberandtype{% |
| 3884 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno % |
| 3885 : |
|
|
\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno % |
| 3886 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 % |
| 3887 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno % |
| 3888 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\else % |
| 3889 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno % |
| 3890 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\fi \fi \fi } |
| 3891 : |
|
|
|
| 3892 : |
|
|
\def\Yappendixletterandtype{% |
| 3893 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}% |
| 3894 : |
|
|
\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno % |
| 3895 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 % |
| 3896 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno % |
| 3897 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\else % |
| 3898 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno % |
| 3899 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\fi \fi \fi } |
| 3900 : |
|
|
|
| 3901 : |
|
|
\gdef\xreftie{'tie} |
| 3902 : |
|
|
|
| 3903 : |
|
|
% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error |
| 3904 : |
|
|
% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. |
| 3905 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 3906 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined |
| 3907 : |
|
|
\let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0. |
| 3908 : |
|
|
\else |
| 3909 : |
|
|
\def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space} |
| 3910 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 3911 : |
|
|
|
| 3912 : |
|
|
% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. |
| 3913 : |
|
|
% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. |
| 3914 : |
|
|
|
| 3915 : |
|
|
\def\refx#1#2{% |
| 3916 : |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax |
| 3917 : |
|
|
% If not defined, say something at least. |
| 3918 : |
|
|
$\langle$un\-de\-fined$\rangle$% |
| 3919 : |
|
|
\ifhavexrefs |
| 3920 : |
|
|
\message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% |
| 3921 : |
|
|
\else |
| 3922 : |
|
|
\ifwarnedxrefs\else |
| 3923 : |
|
|
\global\warnedxrefstrue |
| 3924 : |
|
|
\message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% |
| 3925 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 3926 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 3927 : |
|
|
\else |
| 3928 : |
|
|
% It's defined, so just use it. |
| 3929 : |
|
|
\csname X#1\endcsname |
| 3930 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 3931 : |
|
|
#2% Output the suffix in any case. |
| 3932 : |
|
|
} |
| 3933 : |
|
|
|
| 3934 : |
|
|
% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. |
| 3935 : |
|
|
|
| 3936 : |
|
|
% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. |
| 3937 : |
|
|
\def\xrdef #1#2{ |
| 3938 : |
|
|
{\catcode`\'=\other\expandafter \gdef \csname X#1\endcsname {#2}}} |
| 3939 : |
|
|
|
| 3940 : |
|
|
\def\readauxfile{% |
| 3941 : |
|
|
\begingroup |
| 3942 : |
|
|
\catcode `\^^@=\other |
| 3943 : |
|
|
\catcode `\=\other |
| 3944 : |
|
|
\catcode `\=\other |
| 3945 : |
|
|
\catcode `\^^C=\other |
| 3946 : |
|
|
\catcode `\^^D=\other |
| 3947 : |
|
|
\catcode `\^^E=\other |
| 3948 : |
|
|
\catcode `\^^F=\other |
| 3949 : |
|
|
\catcode `\^^G=\other |
| 3950 : |
|
|
\catcode `\^^H=\other |
| 3951 : |
|
|
\catcode `\=\other |
| 3952 : |
|
|
\catcode `\^^L=\other |
| 3953 : |
|
|
\catcode `\=\other |
| 3954 : |
|
|
\catcode `\=\other |
| 3955 : |
|
|
\catcode `\=\other |
| 3956 : |
|
|
\catcode `\=\other |
| 3957 : |
|
|
\catcode `\=\other |
| 3958 : |
|
|
\catcode `\=\other |
| 3959 : |
|
|
\catcode `\=\other |
| 3960 : |
|
|
\catcode `\=\other |
| 3961 : |
|
|
\catcode `\=\other |
| 3962 : |
|
|
\catcode `\=\other |
| 3963 : |
|
|
\catcode `\=\other |
| 3964 : |
|
|
\catcode `\=\other |
| 3965 : |
|
|
\catcode 26=\other |
| 3966 : |
|
|
\catcode `\^^[=\other |
| 3967 : |
|
|
\catcode `\^^\=\other |
| 3968 : |
|
|
\catcode `\^^]=\other |
| 3969 : |
|
|
\catcode `\^^^=\other |
| 3970 : |
|
|
\catcode `\^^_=\other |
| 3971 : |
|
|
\catcode `\@=\other |
| 3972 : |
|
|
\catcode `\^=\other |
| 3973 : |
|
|
\catcode `\~=\other |
| 3974 : |
|
|
\catcode `\[=\other |
| 3975 : |
|
|
\catcode `\]=\other |
| 3976 : |
|
|
\catcode`\"=\other |
| 3977 : |
|
|
\catcode`\_=\other |
| 3978 : |
|
|
\catcode`\|=\other |
| 3979 : |
|
|
\catcode`\<=\other |
| 3980 : |
|
|
\catcode`\>=\other |
| 3981 : |
|
|
\catcode `\$=\other |
| 3982 : |
|
|
\catcode `\#=\other |
| 3983 : |
|
|
\catcode `\&=\other |
| 3984 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% `\+ does not work, so use 43. |
| 3985 : |
|
|
\catcode 43=\other |
| 3986 : |
|
|
% Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters |
| 3987 : |
|
|
{% |
| 3988 : |
|
|
\count 1=128 |
| 3989 : |
|
|
\def\loop{% |
| 3990 : |
|
|
\catcode\count 1=\other |
| 3991 : |
|
|
\advance\count 1 by 1 |
| 3992 : |
|
|
\ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi |
| 3993 : |
|
|
}% |
| 3994 : |
|
|
}% |
| 3995 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% the aux file uses ' as the escape. |
| 3996 : |
|
|
% Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on |
| 3997 : |
|
|
% entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names. |
| 3998 : |
|
|
% For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^ |
| 3999 : |
|
|
% Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish, |
| 4000 : |
|
|
% but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in. |
| 4001 : |
|
|
\catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 |
| 4002 : |
|
|
\catcode `\%=\other |
| 4003 : |
|
|
\catcode `\'=0 |
| 4004 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\catcode`\^=7 % to make ^^e4 etc usable in xref tags |
| 4005 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\catcode `\\=\other |
| 4006 : |
|
|
\openin 1 \jobname.aux |
| 4007 : |
|
|
\ifeof 1 \else \closein 1 \input \jobname.aux \global\havexrefstrue |
| 4008 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\global\warnedobstrue |
| 4009 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\fi |
| 4010 : |
|
|
% Open the new aux file. Tex will close it automatically at exit. |
| 4011 : |
|
|
\openout \auxfile=\jobname.aux |
| 4012 : |
|
|
\endgroup} |
| 4013 : |
|
|
|
| 4014 : |
|
|
|
| 4015 : |
|
|
% Footnotes. |
| 4016 : |
|
|
|
| 4017 : |
|
|
\newcount \footnoteno |
| 4018 : |
|
|
|
| 4019 : |
|
|
% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is |
| 4020 : |
|
|
% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a |
| 4021 : |
|
|
% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is |
| 4022 : |
|
|
% removed. |
| 4023 : |
|
|
\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } |
| 4024 : |
|
|
|
| 4025 : |
|
|
% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.. |
| 4026 : |
|
|
\let\footnotestyle=\comment |
| 4027 : |
|
|
|
| 4028 : |
|
|
\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote |
| 4029 : |
|
|
|
| 4030 : |
|
|
{\catcode `\@=11 |
| 4031 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 4032 : |
|
|
% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. |
| 4033 : |
|
|
\gdef\footnote{% |
| 4034 : |
|
|
\global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne |
| 4035 : |
|
|
\edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% |
| 4036 : |
|
|
% |
| 4037 : |
|
|
% In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the |
| 4038 : |
|
|
% extra spacing after we do the footnote number. |
| 4039 : |
|
|
\let\@sf\empty |
| 4040 : |
|
|
\ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi |
| 4041 : |
|
|
% |
| 4042 : |
|
|
% Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. |
| 4043 : |
|
|
\unskip |
| 4044 : |
|
|
\thisfootno\@sf |
| 4045 : |
|
|
\footnotezzz |
| 4046 : |
|
|
}% |
| 4047 : |
|
|
|
| 4048 : |
|
|
% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the |
| 4049 : |
|
|
% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. |
| 4050 : |
|
|
% |
| 4051 : |
|
|
\long\gdef\footnotezzz#1{\insert\footins{% |
| 4052 : |
|
|
% We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the |
| 4053 : |
|
|
% footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. |
| 4054 : |
|
|
% So reset some parameters. |
| 4055 : |
|
|
\interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty |
| 4056 : |
|
|
\splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes |
| 4057 : |
|
|
\splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox |
| 4058 : |
|
|
\floatingpenalty\@MM |
| 4059 : |
|
|
\leftskip\z@skip |
| 4060 : |
|
|
\rightskip\z@skip |
| 4061 : |
|
|
\spaceskip\z@skip |
| 4062 : |
|
|
\xspaceskip\z@skip |
| 4063 : |
|
|
\parindent\defaultparindent |
| 4064 : |
|
|
% |
| 4065 : |
|
|
% Hang the footnote text off the number. |
| 4066 : |
|
|
\hang |
| 4067 : |
|
|
\textindent{\thisfootno}% |
| 4068 : |
|
|
% |
| 4069 : |
|
|
% Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this |
| 4070 : |
|
|
% expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it |
| 4071 : |
|
|
% provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. |
| 4072 : |
|
|
\footstrut |
| 4073 : |
|
|
#1\strut}% |
| 4074 : |
|
|
} |
| 4075 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 4076 : |
|
|
}%end \catcode `\@=11 |
| 4077 : |
|
|
|
| 4078 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size |
| 4079 : |
|
|
% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers |
| 4080 : |
|
|
% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. |
| 4081 : |
|
|
% |
| 4082 : |
|
|
\def\lineskipfactor{.08333} |
| 4083 : |
|
|
\def\strutheightpercent{.70833} |
| 4084 : |
|
|
\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} |
| 4085 : |
|
|
% |
| 4086 : |
|
|
\def\setleading#1{% |
| 4087 : |
|
|
\normalbaselineskip = #1\relax |
| 4088 : |
|
|
\normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip |
| 4089 : |
|
|
\normalbaselines |
| 4090 : |
|
|
\setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% |
| 4091 : |
|
|
\vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip |
| 4092 : |
|
|
depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip |
| 4093 : |
|
|
}% |
| 4094 : |
|
|
} |
| 4095 : |
|
|
|
| 4096 : |
|
|
% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should |
| 4097 : |
|
|
% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the |
| 4098 : |
|
|
% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would |
| 4099 : |
|
|
% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main |
| 4100 : |
|
|
% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). |
| 4101 : |
|
|
% |
| 4102 : |
|
|
\def\|{% |
| 4103 : |
|
|
% \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. |
| 4104 : |
|
|
\leavevmode |
| 4105 : |
|
|
% |
| 4106 : |
|
|
% Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. |
| 4107 : |
|
|
\vadjust{% |
| 4108 : |
|
|
% We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current |
| 4109 : |
|
|
% leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. |
| 4110 : |
|
|
\vskip-\baselineskip |
| 4111 : |
|
|
% |
| 4112 : |
|
|
% \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So |
| 4113 : |
|
|
% the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. |
| 4114 : |
|
|
\llap{% |
| 4115 : |
|
|
% |
| 4116 : |
|
|
% For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. |
| 4117 : |
|
|
\vrule height\baselineskip width1pt |
| 4118 : |
|
|
% |
| 4119 : |
|
|
% This is the space between the bar and the text. |
| 4120 : |
|
|
\hskip 12pt |
| 4121 : |
|
|
}% |
| 4122 : |
|
|
}% |
| 4123 : |
|
|
} |
| 4124 : |
|
|
|
| 4125 : |
|
|
% For a final copy, take out the rectangles |
| 4126 : |
|
|
% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided |
| 4127 : |
|
|
% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). |
| 4128 : |
|
|
% |
| 4129 : |
|
|
\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} |
| 4130 : |
|
|
|
| 4131 : |
|
|
|
| 4132 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% End of control word definitions. |
| 4133 : |
|
|
|
| 4134 : |
|
|
\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} |
| 4135 : |
|
|
|
| 4136 : |
|
|
\def\openindices{% |
| 4137 : |
|
|
\newindex{cp}% |
| 4138 : |
|
|
\newcodeindex{fn}% |
| 4139 : |
|
|
\newcodeindex{vr}% |
| 4140 : |
|
|
\newcodeindex{tp}% |
| 4141 : |
|
|
\newcodeindex{ky}% |
| 4142 : |
|
|
\newcodeindex{pg}% |
| 4143 : |
|
|
} |
| 4144 : |
|
|
|
| 4145 : |
|
|
% Set some numeric style parameters, for 8.5 x 11 format. |
| 4146 : |
|
|
|
| 4147 : |
|
|
%\hsize = 6.5in |
| 4148 : |
|
|
\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt |
| 4149 : |
|
|
\parindent = \defaultparindent |
| 4150 : |
|
|
\parskip 18pt plus 1pt |
| 4151 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\setleading{15pt} |
| 4152 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\advance\topskip by 1.2cm |
| 4153 : |
|
|
|
| 4154 : |
|
|
% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. |
| 4155 : |
|
|
\vbadness=10000 |
| 4156 : |
|
|
|
| 4157 : |
|
|
% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans. |
| 4158 : |
|
|
\widowpenalty=10000 |
| 4159 : |
|
|
\clubpenalty=10000 |
| 4160 : |
|
|
|
| 4161 : |
|
|
% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're |
| 4162 : |
|
|
% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of |
| 4163 : |
|
|
% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on |
| 4164 : |
|
|
% \hsize. This makes it come to about 9pt for the 8.5x11 format. |
| 4165 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 4166 : |
|
|
\ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined |
| 4167 : |
|
|
% Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. |
| 4168 : |
|
|
\def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% |
| 4169 : |
|
|
\else |
| 4170 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\emergencystretch = \hsize |
| 4171 : |
|
|
\divide\emergencystretch by 45 |
| 4172 : |
|
|
\fi |
| 4173 : |
|
|
|
| 4174 : |
|
|
% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 format (or else 7x9.25) |
| 4175 : |
|
|
\def\smallbook{ |
| 4176 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
|
| 4177 : |
|
|
% These values for secheadingskip and subsecheadingskip are |
| 4178 : |
|
|
% experiments. RJC 7 Aug 1992 |
| 4179 : |
|
|
\global\secheadingskip = 17pt plus 6pt minus 3pt |
| 4180 : |
|
|
\global\subsecheadingskip = 14pt plus 6pt minus 3pt |
| 4181 : |
|
|
|
| 4182 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\global\lispnarrowing = 0.3in |
| 4183 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\setleading{12pt} |
| 4184 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\advance\topskip by -1cm |
| 4185 : |
|
|
\global\parskip 3pt plus 1pt |
| 4186 : |
|
|
\global\hsize = 5in |
| 4187 : |
|
|
\global\vsize=7.5in |
| 4188 : |
|
|
\global\tolerance=700 |
| 4189 : |
|
|
\global\hfuzz=1pt |
| 4190 : |
|
|
\global\contentsrightmargin=0pt |
| 4191 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\global\deftypemargin=0pt |
| 4192 : |
|
|
\global\defbodyindent=.5cm |
| 4193 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 4194 : |
|
|
\global\pagewidth=\hsize |
| 4195 : |
|
|
\global\pageheight=\vsize |
| 4196 : |
|
|
|
| 4197 : |
|
|
\global\let\smalllisp=\smalllispx |
| 4198 : |
|
|
\global\let\smallexample=\smalllispx |
| 4199 : |
|
|
\global\def\Esmallexample{\Esmalllisp} |
| 4200 : |
|
|
} |
| 4201 : |
|
|
|
| 4202 : |
|
|
% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. |
| 4203 : |
|
|
\def\afourpaper{ |
| 4204 : |
|
|
\global\tolerance=700 |
| 4205 : |
|
|
\global\hfuzz=1pt |
| 4206 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\setleading{12pt} |
| 4207 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\global\parskip 15pt plus 1pt |
| 4208 : |
|
|
|
| 4209 : |
|
|
\global\vsize= 53\baselineskip |
| 4210 : |
|
|
\advance\vsize by \topskip |
| 4211 : |
|
|
%\global\hsize= 5.85in % A4 wide 10pt |
| 4212 : |
|
|
\global\hsize= 6.5in |
| 4213 : |
|
|
\global\outerhsize=\hsize |
| 4214 : |
|
|
\global\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in |
| 4215 : |
|
|
\global\outervsize=\vsize |
| 4216 : |
|
|
\global\advance\outervsize by 0.6in |
| 4217 : |
|
|
|
| 4218 : |
|
|
\global\pagewidth=\hsize |
| 4219 : |
|
|
\global\pageheight=\vsize |
| 4220 : |
|
|
} |
| 4221 : |
|
|
|
| 4222 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Allow control of the text dimensions. Parameters in order: textheight; |
| 4223 : |
|
|
% textwidth; \voffset; \hoffset (!); binding offset. All require a dimension; |
| 4224 : |
|
|
% header is additional; added length extends the bottom of the page. |
| 4225 : |
|
|
|
| 4226 : |
|
|
\def\changepagesizes#1#2#3#4#5{ |
| 4227 : |
|
|
\global\vsize= #1 |
| 4228 : |
|
|
\advance\vsize by \topskip |
| 4229 : |
|
|
\global\voffset= #3 |
| 4230 : |
|
|
\global\hsize= #2 |
| 4231 : |
|
|
\global\outerhsize=\hsize |
| 4232 : |
|
|
\global\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in |
| 4233 : |
|
|
\global\outervsize=\vsize |
| 4234 : |
|
|
\global\advance\outervsize by 0.6in |
| 4235 : |
|
|
\global\pagewidth=\hsize |
| 4236 : |
|
|
\global\pageheight=\vsize |
| 4237 : |
|
|
\global\normaloffset= #4 |
| 4238 : |
|
|
\global\bindingoffset= #5} |
| 4239 : |
|
|
|
| 4240 : |
|
|
% This layout is compatible with Latex on A4 paper. |
| 4241 : |
|
|
|
| 4242 : |
|
|
\def\afourlatex{\changepagesizes{22cm}{15cm}{7mm}{4.6mm}{5mm}} |
| 4243 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
|
| 4244 : |
|
|
% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. |
| 4245 : |
|
|
\catcode`\"=\other |
| 4246 : |
|
|
\catcode`\~=\other |
| 4247 : |
|
|
\catcode`\^=\other |
| 4248 : |
|
|
\catcode`\_=\other |
| 4249 : |
|
|
\catcode`\|=\other |
| 4250 : |
|
|
\catcode`\<=\other |
| 4251 : |
|
|
\catcode`\>=\other |
| 4252 : |
|
|
\catcode`\+=\other |
| 4253 : |
|
|
\def\normaldoublequote{"} |
| 4254 : |
|
|
\def\normaltilde{~} |
| 4255 : |
|
|
\def\normalcaret{^} |
| 4256 : |
|
|
\def\normalunderscore{_} |
| 4257 : |
|
|
\def\normalverticalbar{|} |
| 4258 : |
|
|
\def\normalless{<} |
| 4259 : |
|
|
\def\normalgreater{>} |
| 4260 : |
|
|
\def\normalplus{+} |
| 4261 : |
|
|
|
| 4262 : |
|
|
% This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont |
| 4263 : |
|
|
% where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts, |
| 4264 : |
|
|
% where something hairier probably needs to be done. |
| 4265 : |
|
|
% |
| 4266 : |
|
|
% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print |
| 4267 : |
|
|
% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero |
| 4268 : |
|
|
% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all |
| 4269 : |
|
|
% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. |
| 4270 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 4271 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\the\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} |
| 4272 : |
|
|
|
| 4273 : |
|
|
% Turn off all special characters except @ |
| 4274 : |
|
|
% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). |
| 4275 : |
|
|
% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can |
| 4276 : |
|
|
% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. |
| 4277 : |
|
|
|
| 4278 : |
|
|
\catcode`\"=\active |
| 4279 : |
|
|
\def\activedoublequote{{\tt \char '042}} |
| 4280 : |
|
|
\let"=\activedoublequote |
| 4281 : |
|
|
\catcode`\~=\active |
| 4282 : |
|
|
\def~{{\tt \char '176}} |
| 4283 : |
|
|
\chardef\hat=`\^ |
| 4284 : |
|
|
\catcode`\^=\active |
| 4285 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
\def\auxhat{\def^{'hat}} |
| 4286 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
\def^{{\tt \hat}} |
| 4287 : |
|
|
|
| 4288 : |
|
|
\catcode`\_=\active |
| 4289 : |
|
|
\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} |
| 4290 : |
|
|
% Subroutine for the previous macro. |
| 4291 : |
|
|
\def\_{\lvvmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}} |
| 4292 : |
|
|
|
| 4293 : |
|
|
% \lvvmode is equivalent in function to \leavevmode. |
| 4294 : |
|
|
% Using \leavevmode runs into trouble when written out to |
| 4295 : |
|
|
% an index file due to the expansion of \leavevmode into ``\unhbox |
| 4296 : |
|
|
% \voidb@x'' ---which looks to TeX like ``\unhbox \voidb\x'' due to our |
| 4297 : |
|
|
% magic tricks with @. |
| 4298 : |
|
|
\def\lvvmode{\vbox to 0pt{}} |
| 4299 : |
|
|
|
| 4300 : |
|
|
\catcode`\|=\active |
| 4301 : |
|
|
\def|{{\tt \char '174}} |
| 4302 : |
|
|
\chardef \less=`\< |
| 4303 : |
|
|
\catcode`\<=\active |
| 4304 : |
|
|
\def<{{\tt \less}} |
| 4305 : |
|
|
\chardef \gtr=`\> |
| 4306 : |
|
|
\catcode`\>=\active |
| 4307 : |
|
|
\def>{{\tt \gtr}} |
| 4308 : |
|
|
\catcode`\+=\active |
| 4309 : |
|
|
\def+{{\tt \char 43}} |
| 4310 : |
|
|
%\catcode 27=\active |
| 4311 : |
|
|
%\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$} |
| 4312 : |
|
|
|
| 4313 : |
|
|
% Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time. |
| 4314 : |
|
|
{\catcode`\==\active |
| 4315 : |
|
|
\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}} |
| 4316 : |
|
|
|
| 4317 : |
|
|
\catcode`\@=0 |
| 4318 : |
|
|
|
| 4319 : |
|
|
% \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font |
| 4320 : |
|
|
\global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\ |
| 4321 : |
|
|
%{\catcode`\\=\other |
| 4322 : |
|
|
%@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}} |
| 4323 : |
|
|
|
| 4324 : |
|
|
% \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx. |
| 4325 : |
|
|
{\catcode`\\=\active |
| 4326 : |
|
|
@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }} |
| 4327 : |
|
|
|
| 4328 : |
|
|
% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font. |
| 4329 : |
|
|
\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}} |
| 4330 : |
|
|
|
| 4331 : |
|
|
% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. |
| 4332 : |
|
|
\escapechar=`\@ |
| 4333 : |
|
|
|
| 4334 : |
|
|
% \catcode 17=0 % Define control-q |
| 4335 : |
|
|
\catcode`\\=\active |
| 4336 : |
|
|
|
| 4337 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters |
| 4338 : |
|
|
% even after parsing them. |
| 4339 : |
|
|
@def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote |
| 4340 : |
|
|
@let\=@realbackslash |
| 4341 : |
|
|
@let~=@normaltilde |
| 4342 : |
|
|
@let^=@normalcaret |
| 4343 : |
|
|
@let_=@normalunderscore |
| 4344 : |
|
|
@let|=@normalverticalbar |
| 4345 : |
|
|
@let<=@normalless |
| 4346 : |
|
|
@let>=@normalgreater |
| 4347 : |
|
|
@let+=@normalplus} |
| 4348 : |
|
|
|
| 4349 : |
|
|
@def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote |
| 4350 : |
|
|
@let\=@normalbackslash |
| 4351 : |
|
|
@let~=@normaltilde |
| 4352 : |
|
|
@let^=@normalcaret |
| 4353 : |
|
|
@let_=@normalunderscore |
| 4354 : |
|
|
@let|=@normalverticalbar |
| 4355 : |
|
|
@let<=@normalless |
| 4356 : |
|
|
@let>=@normalgreater |
| 4357 : |
|
|
@let+=@normalplus} |
| 4358 : |
|
|
|
| 4359 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. |
| 4360 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing |
| 4361 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% a backslash. |
| 4362 : |
|
|
% |
| 4363 : |
|
|
@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} |
| 4364 : |
|
|
@global@let\ = @eatinput |
| 4365 : |
|
|
|
| 4366 : |
|
|
% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then |
| 4367 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix |
| 4368 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. |
| 4369 : |
pazsan
|
1.2
|
% |
| 4370 : |
anton
|
1.1
|
@gdef@fixbackslash{@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi} |
| 4371 : |
|
|
|
| 4372 : |
|
|
%% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. The @rm below |
| 4373 : |
|
|
%% makes sure that the current font starts out as the newly loaded cmr10 |
| 4374 : |
|
|
@catcode`@$=@other @catcode`@%=@other @catcode`@&=@other @catcode`@#=@other |
| 4375 : |
|
|
|
| 4376 : |
|
|
@textfonts |
| 4377 : |
|
|
@rm |
| 4378 : |
|
|
|
| 4379 : |
|
|
@c Local variables: |
| 4380 : |
|
|
@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" |
| 4381 : |
|
|
@c End: |